Ead Grammar v1

Contents
Section I
Introduction
Essentials
Section II - Grammar
Nouns
Pronouns
Adjectives
Verbs
Adverbs
Prepositions
Conjunctions
Section III - Usage
Courtesies
Questions
Negation
Ownership
Numbers
Quantities
Which one?
PRO version Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com
Which one?
Time
Section IV - How to say...
This section will be coming soon...
Appendices
Arabic writing and pronunciation

More about verbs than you will ever want to know
Irregular verbs
About this document
Copyright
Introduction
This document is a concise reference to grammar for people who are learning the spoken arabic of
Egypt. It is intended to be used alongside other study aids available free of charge at
www.lisaanmasry.com.
If you want to see a wider range of examples of Egyptian Arabic, check out the Lonely Planet
publication "Egyptian Arabic Phrasebook" by Siona Jenkins. It is a very useful pocket guide.
Getting started
This document is made up of three main sections:
essentials - an introduction to grammatical terms and to Egyptian arabic, pointing out the
similarities and differences between Egyptian and English
grammar - a description of how to build sentences using the standard language elements
usage - commonly used words, phrases and expressions
A word about arabic writing

It is not difficult to learn to read and write in arabic, but it is an additional barrier to learning.
Realistically, you are unlikely ever to see Egyptian Arabic in print: notices, packaging, adverts, web
sites etc are written in Modern Standard Arabic. And if you want to read Arabic handwriting, that's a
different ballgame altogether. An understanding of the Arabic alphabet can sometimes be useful,
but it is by no means essential.
The examples in this document are therefore written in both arabic and roman letters. There are two
ways of writing arabic using roman letters: the transliterated form tells you exactly how it would be
written in arabic, and the pronounced form gives you an indication of how to pronounce it in
european letters. For the pronounced form, I have chosen to write things how and english person
would. My apologies to people whose first language is not english.
The pronunciation rules, the arabic alphabet and the transliterated and pronounced spelling are
explained in the section on arabic writing and pronunciation
The examples in the PDF version are this document are written in arabic and in pronounced form.
The essentials- Same same but different

In many cases, Egyptian uses the same structure as English: let's first look at some simple
examples where the structure is similar, then move on to the differences.
Nouns and verbs
Here is a simple sentence in both english and Egyptian:
Ahmed loves sarah

aacHmad biyiHibb saarao
Element English Egyptian

'ahmad
subject noun Ahmed
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
biyihibb
verb loves
‫ﺐ‬
ّ ‫ﺑـِﯿـِﺤِـ‬
saara
object noun Sarah
‫ﺳﺎ َر َة‬
In both the English and Egyptian examples, there are three words: two words are nouns (people,
things or ideas) and the middle word is a verb, which explains what is happening. In both cases, the
noun before the verb (Ahmed) is the subject (the person or thing that is doing something) and the
noun after the verb (Sarah) is the object- is the person or thing that is having something done to it.
We can change the meaning by turning the words around, like this:
Sarah loves Ahmed

saarao bitHibb aacHmad
saara
subject noun Sarah
bitihibb
verb loves
‫ﺐ‬
ّ ‫ﺑـِﺘـِﺤِـ‬
'ahmad
object noun Ahmed
The nouns do not change, they have just moved: we know from the order of the words that Sarah is
now the subject- the one who is loving, and Ahmed is now the object, the one who is loved. In
english, the verb does not change at all, but in Egyptian it changes a little because the subject is
now female, not male. We will look in more detail at how exactly verbs change to match the subject
later, in the section on verbs.
Subject and Object

The subject and object can be a name, for example Sarah and Ahmed, but there are some other
possiblities as well. Here are some examples:

saara
name Sarah
irraagil
irraagil
noun (specific) the man
‫ا ِﻟﺮا َﺟـِﻞ‬
issitt
the woman
‫ﺖ‬
ّ ‫ا ِﻟﺴِـ‬
il'utta
the cat
‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ‬
ilfikra
the idea
‫ا ِﻟﻔـِﻜﺮ َة‬
raagil
noun(general) a man
‫را َﺟـِﻞ‬
sitt
a woman
‫ﺖ‬
ّ ‫ﺳِـ‬
'utta
a cat
‫ﻗُـﻄﱠـﺔ‬
fikra
an idea
‫ﻓـِﻜﺮ َة‬
shwyit rigalae
noun(quantity) some men
‫ﺷﻮﯾـِﺔ ر ِﺟﺎ َﻻ َة‬
chamas rigala
five men
‫ﻻ‬
َ َ ‫ﺧـَﻤـَﺲ ر ِﺟﺎ‬
'ay raagil
any man
‫أي را َﺟـِﻞ‬
huwwa
pronoun(subject) he
‫ﻫُـ ﱠﻮ‬
hiya
she
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬
-uh
pronoun(object) him
‫ــُه‬
-ha
her
‫ـﻬَﺎ‬
The word il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬is corresponds to 'the' in english, but there is no equivalent to 'a'. The noun just
appears on its own.
Note that adding il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬to a word affects the pronunciation if it begins with a sun letter.
Pronouns
Pronouns are the short words like I and they that often replace nouns in spoken English and
Egyptian, to make our speech clearer and more concise. Here is a simple example:
I love her
aacnaa baHibbahaa
'ana
subject pronoun I
‫أﻧَﺎ‬
bahibb
verb love
‫ﺐ‬
ّ ‫ﺑـَﺤِـ‬
-aha
object pronoun her
‫ــَهَا‬
We can see that the subject is still at the start of the sentence and the object is still at the end of the
sentence, but in Egyptian the object pronoun is attached to the end of the verb. Let's turn that round
and see what happens:
she loves me
hiya bitiHibb-ny

hiya
subject pronoun she
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬
bitihibb
verb loves
‫ﺐ‬
ّ ‫ﺑـِﺘـِﺤِـ‬
-ny
object pronoun me
‫ـﻨﻲ‬
Woa, what happened there? Everything changed, in both English and Egyptian! The reason is that,
in both languages, there are different forms of the pronoun for subject and object. There is a third
form of the pronoun that indicates ownership (my/his/your/their/its) but we will save that until we
cover pronouns in more detail. For now, let's just look at the subject and object pronouns.
Remember that object pronouns are attached to the end of the verb.
Subject Object
English Egyptian English Egyptian
'ana -ny
I me
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ـﻨﻲ‬
'ihna -na
we us
‫إﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ـﻨَﺎ‬
'inta -ak
you(m) you(m)
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ــَك‬
'inti -ik
you(f) you(f)
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ــِك‬
'intu -ukw
you(pl) you(pl)
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ــُكو‬
huwwa -uh
he/it(m) him/it(m)
‫ﻫُـ ﱠﻮ‬ ‫ــُه‬
PRO version Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API
hiya -ha pdfcrowd.com
hiya -ha
she/it(f) her/it(f)
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫ـﻬَﺎ‬
humma -uhum
they them
‫ﻫُـ ﱠﻢ‬ ‫ــُهـُم‬
Here are a few more examples:
English Egyptian
'ana Aaarifuh
I know him
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓـُﻪ‬
'ahmad Aaarifuh
Ahmed knows him
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓـُﻪ‬
saara Aaarifah
Sarah knows him
‫ﺳﺎ َر َة ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓـَﻪ‬
'ana bashrab sagaeyar
I smoke cigarettes
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﺑﺎ َﺷﺮ َب ﺳـَﺠﺎ َﯾـَﺮ‬
'ana baktib kutub
I write books
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﺑﺎ َﻛﺘـِﺐ ﻛـُﺘﻮب‬
'ahmad biyiktib kutub
Ahmed writes books
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺑـِﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ ﻛـُﺘﻮب‬
huwwa biyiktib kutub
PRO version
he writes books
Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com
he writes books
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺑـِﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ ﻛـُﺘﻮب‬
Note that the subject pronoun can be omitted if the meaning is still clear
There is no 'is'
The word is/am/are is one of the most commonly use verbs in english.... but, if you are talking about
something now (not the past or future), there is no word in Egyptian for 'is'. That's quite a big
difference, but it's not too difficult. Let's take a look at some examples:
English Egyptian
'ana taAbaen
I am tired
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َن‬
'ahmad masry
Ahmed is Egyptian
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﻣـَﺼﺮي‬
il'utat fy ilginyna
the cats are in the garden
‫ا ِﻟﻘـُﻄـَﻂ ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟﺠـِﻨﯿﻨـَﺔ‬
saara mawguda
Sarah is available
‫ﺳﺎ َر َة ﻣـَﻮﺟﻮد َة‬
innahaarda ilgumAa
today is friday
‫ا ِﻟﻨـَﻬﺎ َرد َة ا ِﻟﺠـُﻤﻌـَﺔ‬
dy miraaty
dy miraaty
this is my wife
‫دي ﻣـِﺮا َﺗﻲ‬
guzy fy ilbiyt
my husband is at home
‫ﺟﻮزي ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ‬
When you are talking about a past or future situation, then the Egyptian words kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬- was and
haykun ‫ ﻫـَﯿﻜﻮن‬- will be are used. This will be covered in more detail later under verbs. Here are
some simple examples:
English Egyptian
'ana taAbaen
I am tired
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َن‬
'ahmad taAbaen
Ahmed is tired
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َن‬
'ana kunt taAbaen
I was tired
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻛـُﻨﺖ ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َن‬
'ahmad kaen taAbaen
Ahmed was tired
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﻛﺎ َن ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َن‬
'ana hakun taAbaen
I will be tired
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻫـَﻜﻮن ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َن‬
'ahmad hayikun taAbaen
Ahmed will be tired
Ahmed will be tired
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﻫـَﯿـِﻜﻮن ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َن‬
There is no 'have'
The verb have is widely used in English, but there is no equivalent verb in Egyptian. Have is used
in many ways in English, and in Egyptian a different word is used for each meaning.
Meaning English Egyptian

maAaya kabryt
have with me I have matches
‫ﻣـَﻌـَﯿﺎ َ ﻛـَﺒﺮﯾﺖ‬
Aandy biyt
own I have a house
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي ﺑـِﯿﺖ‬
laezim 'aruwh
must I have to go
‫ﻻ َز ِم أر ُوح‬
I will have dinner hatAashsha
eat, etc
(I will dine) ‫ﻫـَﺘﻌَـﺸﱠﺎ‬
I will have a nap haechuz taAsyla
take
(I will take a nap) ‫ﻫﺎ َﺧـُﺬ ﺗـَﻌﺴﯿﻠـَﺔ‬
Masculine, feminine, plural

Like many european languages, all Egyptian nouns are either masculine or feminine. Here are
some examples:
Gender English Arabic

kitaeb
masculine book
‫ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
kalb
masculine dog
‫ﻛـَﻠﺐ‬
raagil
masculine man
biyt
masculine biyt
‫ﺑـِﯿﺖ‬
laban
masculine milk
‫ﻟـَﺒـَﻦ‬
salaem
masculine peace
‫ﺳـَﻼ َم‬
mudarris
masculine teacher
‫ﻣـُﺪ َ ّر ِس‬
mudarrisa
feminine teacher
‫ﻣـُﺪ َ ّر ِﺳـَﺔ‬
fikra
fikra
feminine idea
tarabyza
feminine table ‫ﺗـَﺮا َﺑﯿﺰ‬
‫َة‬
warsha
feminine workshop
‫و َرﺷـَﺔ‬
sitt
feminine woman
‫ﺖ‬
ّ ‫ﺳِـ‬
daughter bint
feminine
girl ‫ﺑـِﻨﺖ‬
naar
feminine fire
‫ﻧﺎ َر‬
raas
feminine head
‫را َس‬
As you can see, the majority of feminine nouns end in -a ‫ــَة‬. There are a few exceptions though:
some are obvious, like woman and daughter, but others, you just need to learn them. We will cover
this in more detail in the section on nouns.
In both english and Egyptian, there are two forms of a noun: singular and plural. Here are some
examples of plurals:
English Arabic
Singular Plural Singular Plural
kitaeb kutub
book books
‫ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬ ‫ﻛـُﺘـُﺐ‬
kalb kilaeb
dog dogs
‫ﻛـَﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻛـِﻼ َب‬
raagil riggala
man men
‫را َﺟـِﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ‬
َ َ ‫ر ِﺟّﺎ‬
tifl 'atfael
child children
‫ﻃـِﻔﻞ‬ ‫أﻃﻔﺎ َل‬
biyt buyut
house house
‫ﺑـِﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﺑـُﯿﻮت‬
laban
milk
‫ﻟـَﺒـَﻦ‬
salaem
peace
‫ﺳـَﻼ َم‬
mudarris mudarrisyn
teacher(m) teachers
‫ﻣـُﺪ َ ّر ِس‬ ‫ﻣـُﺪ َ ّر ِﺳﯿﻦ‬
mudarrisa mudarrisaet
teacher(f) teachers
teacher(f) teachers
‫ﻣـُﺪ َ ّر ِﺳـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻣـُﺪ َ ّر ِﺳﺎ َت‬
fikra 'afkaar
idea ideas
‫ﻓـِﻜﺮ َة‬ ‫أﻓﻜﺎ َر‬
tarabyza
tarabyzaet
table tables ‫ﺗـَﺮا َﺑﯿﺰ‬
‫ﺗـَﺮا َﺑﯿﺰا َت‬
‫َة‬
warsha wirash
workshop workshops
‫و َرﺷـَﺔ‬ ‫و ِر َش‬
sitt sattaet
woman women
‫ﺖ‬
ّ ‫ﺳِـ‬ ‫ﺳَـﺘّﺎ َت‬
daughter daughters bint banaet
girl girls ‫ﺑـِﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺑـَﻨﺎ َت‬
naar nyraan
fire fires
‫ﻧﺎ َر‬ ‫ﻧﯿﺮا َن‬
raas ru'wus
head heads
‫را َس‬ ‫ر ُ وس‬
In english, the majority of plural nouns are the same as the singular, with a suffix of -s for example
book/books, but there are a small number of words with unusual plurals, for example man/men and
child/children. In Egyptian, feminine nouns that end in -a ‫ ــَة‬have a very straightforward plural- or -at
‫ـﺎ َت‬: plurals of masculine nouns vary quite a lot- the vowels move about a bit but the consonants
remain the same. You will need to learn them.
Note that, both in english and Egyptian, some words do not have a plural- for example milk and
peace.
Adjectives
Adjectives are words that describe something- for example, good or small. In english, adjectives do
not change, but in Egyptian there are different forms of an adjective for masculine, feminine and
plural. Here are some examples:
English Egyptian
huwwa taAbaen
he is tired
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َن‬
hiya taAbaena
she is tired
‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َﻧـَﺔ‬
humma taAbanyn
they are tired
‫ﻫُـ ّﻢ َ ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َﻧﯿﻦ‬
huwwa kuwayis
he is good
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺲ‬
hiya kuwayisa
she is good
‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺴـَﺔ‬
humma kuwayisyn
they are good
‫ﻫُـ ّﻢ َ ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺴﯿﻦ‬
The good news is that the majority of adjectives require just a different ending for feminine- -a ‫ــَة‬
and plural -yn ‫ ـﯿﻦ‬forms. We will cover this in more detail in the section on adjectives
Adverbs
Just as adjectives describe a noun, adverbs say something about a verb - where, when, how often,
how much etc. They can also be used to describe the extent of an adjective (very good) or even
another adverb (very slowly). Many English adverbs end with -ly. Usage of adverbs is very similar
in English and Egyptian: here are some examples
describing English Egyptian

'ana hargaA baAd shuwaya
verb I will come back soon
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻫـَﺮﺟـَﻊ ﺑـَﻌﺪ ﺷـُﻮ َﯾـَﺔ‬
'ahmad biyimshy bisuraAa
verb Ahmed walks quickly
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺑـِﯿـِﻤﺸﻲ ﺑـِﺴـُﺮ َﻋـَﺔ‬
'ahmad shaatir giddaen
adjective Ahmed is extremely clever
‫ا‬‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺷﺎ َﻃـِﺮ ﺟِـﺪ‬
'ahmad biyisu' bisuraAa maA'ula
adverb Ahmed drives reasonably fast
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺑـِﯿـِﺴﻮق ﺑـِﺴـُﺮ َﻋـَﺔ ﻣـَﻌﻘﻮﻟـَﺔ‬
Prepositions
In English, prepositions link to a noun. This is possible in Egyptian, but prepositions are also
commonly used in place of verbs.
In Egyptian, prepositions are widely used in place of verbs, for example have is usually expressed
using the prepositions Aand ‫( ﻋـَﻨﺪ‬own) and maAa ‫( ﻣَـ َﻊ‬have with you): see ownership for more
information. Here are some examples of prepositions:

baAd hiya gaet baAd ilAashaa'
after she came after dinner
‫ﺑـَﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﺟﺎ َت ﺑـَﻌﺪ ا ِﻟﻌـَﺸﺎ َء‬
wara ilginyna wara ilbiyt
behind the garden is behind the house
‫و َرَا‬ ‫ا ِﻟﺠـِﻨﯿﻨـَﺔ و َرا َ ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ‬
Aand Aandy biyt fy il'aehira
have I have a house in Cairo
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي ﺑـِﯿﺖ ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟﻘﺎ َﻫـِﺮ َة‬
fy fy mayae
there is there is water
‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣـَﯿﺎ َة‬
Conjunctions
A conjunction joins two clauses to make a much more complex sentence. Here is an example:
I want to make bread but I don't have enough flour

Aaayiz aacAamil Aiysh lakin maAandysh diqyq kifaayao
Part English Egyptian

Aaeyiz 'aAamil Aiysh
Main clause I want to make bread
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ أﻋـَﻤـِﻞ ﻋـِﯿﺶ‬
lakin
Conjunction but
‫ﻟـَﻜـِﻦ‬
maAandysh di'y' kifaeya
Second clause I don't have enough flour
‫ﻣـَﻌـَﻨﺪﯾﺶ د ِﻗﯿﻖ ﻛـِﻔﺎ َﯾـَﺔ‬
In English, the same word is often used for a preposition and a conjunction, but in Egyptian it may
be different. Sometimes it is only necessary to add the word ma ‫ ﻣَﺎ‬to convert a preposition to a
conjunction.

preposition 'iGsil iydyk 'abl ilAashaa'
wash your hands before dinner
(dinner is a noun) ‫إﻏﺴـِﻞ ا ِﯾﺪﯾﻚ ﻗـَﺒﻞ ا ِﻟﻌـَﺸﺎ َء‬
conjunction 'iGsil iydyk 'abl ma taekul
(you eat is a clause- wash your hands before you eat
it contains a verb)
‫إﻏﺴـِﻞ ا ِﯾﺪﯾﻚ ﻗـَﺒﻞ ﻣﺎ َ ﺗﺎ َﻛـُﻞ‬
Nouns
A noun represents a person, thing or concept. Here are some examples:
Type English Arabic

'ahmad
person Ahmed
raagil
person man
laeAib
person player
‫ﻻ َﻋـِﺐ‬
gild
thing leather
‫ﺟـِﻠﺪ‬
hikma
concept wisdom
‫ﺣـِﻜﻤـَﺔ‬
myAaed
concept appointment
‫ﻣﯿﻌﺎ َد‬
Masculine and feminine

In arabic, nouns can be masculine or feminine. This does not necessarily mean that they belong to
male and female persons. Most words that end with -a ‫ ــَة‬are feminine. In addition, there are a small
number of words that do not end in -a ‫ ــَة‬that are also feminine. Some of these words are obvious:
others less so. Here are some examples of feminine nouns:
English Arabic
fikra
idea
sitt
woman
‫ﺖ‬
ّ ‫ﺳِـ‬
bint
daughter
‫ﺑـِﻨﺖ‬
naar
fire
‫ﻧﺎ َر‬
raas
head
‫را َس‬
Plurals
If there is more than one of something, the noun becomes a plural. For many nouns, only the ending
changes.
Gender Ending Singular Plural

-yn muhaesib muhaesibyn
masculine
‫ﻣـُﺤﺎ َﺳـِﺒﯿﻦ ﻣـُﺤﺎ َﺳـِﺐ ـﯿﻦ‬
-at muhasba muhaesibat
feminine
‫ﻣـُﺤﺎ َﺳﺒـَﺔ ـﺎ َت‬ ‫ﻣـُﺤﺎ َﺳـِﺒﺎ َت‬
Occupations
Generally speaking, the plural for trades ends with either -yn ‫ ـﯿﻦ‬or -aya ‫ــَيـَة‬, but for professions
there are different endings for men -yn ‫ ـﯿﻦ‬and women -at ‫ـﺎ َت‬.
English Singular Plural

naggaar naggaaryn
carpenter
‫ﻧَـﺠّﺎ َر‬ ‫ﻧَـﺠّﺎ َرﯾﻦ‬
chudary chudariyya
greengrocer
‫ﺧـُﻀـَﺮ ِﯾﯿـَﺔ ﺧـُﻀـَﺮي‬
mudarris mudarrisyn
male teacher
‫ﻣـُﺪ َ ّر ِﺳﯿﻦ ﻣـُﺪ َ ّر ِس‬
mudarrisa mudarrisat
female teacher
‫ﻣـُﺪ َ ّر ِﺳـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻣـُﺪ َ ّر ِﺳﺎ َت‬
Collective nouns
In english, fish can mean pieces of fish or one fish or several: the former is described as a
collective noun. In Egyptian, many foods- and some other things- have a collective noun. You can
talk about one item, for example one fish, by adding -a ‫ ــَة‬ending
English Collective one

biyd biyda
eggs
‫ﺑـِﯿﺾ‬ ‫ﺑـِﯿﻀـَﺔ‬
samak samaka
fish
‫ﺳـَﻤـَﻚ‬ ‫ﺳـَﻤـَﻜـَﺔ‬
dibbaen dibbaena
flies
‫د ِﺑّﺎ َن‬ ‫د ِﺑّﺎ َﻧـَﺔ‬
Many materials- things that can be used to make something from, like leather or cloth, are treated in
the same way: you add -a ‫ ــَة‬to give the meaning a piece of...
English Collective a piece

chashab chashaba
wood
‫ﺧـَﺸـَﺐ‬ ‫ﺧـَﺸـَﺒـَﺔ‬
sabun sabuna
soap
‫ﺻﺎ َﺑﻮن‬ ‫ﺻﺎ َﺑﻮﻧـَﺔ‬
Pairs
The egyptian word for shoes (gazma ‫ )ﺟـَﺰﻣـَﺔ‬relates to a pair. For a single shoe, it is necessary to
say fardit gazma ‫ﻓـَﺮد ِة ﺟـَﺰﻣـَﺔ‬.
English Egyptian
gazma
shoes
‫ﺟـَﺰﻣـَﺔ‬
sharaab
socks
‫ﺷـَﺮا َب‬
guwanty
gloves
‫ﺟـُﻮا َﻧﺘﻲ‬
Duals
If you want to talk about two people, or specify a quantity of two, see the section on two in numbers.
If you want to talk about two things (not people or quantities), you should use the dual suffix -yn ‫ـﯿﻦ‬.
This is equivalent to a couple which can mean exactly two, or approximately two. There are slightly
different forms for feminine nouns and words ending in -y ‫ـﻲ‬. Here are some examples:
English Egyptian Suffix English Egyptian
kitaeb -yn
book (m) two books kitaabyn
‫ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬ ‫ـﯿﻦ‬
chair kursy -tyn
two chairs kursiyyin
(ends with y) ‫ﻛـُﺮﺳﻲ‬ ‫ـﺘﯿﻦ‬
di'y'a -iyyin
minute (f) a couple of minutes diqiqtyn
‫د ِﻗﯿﻘـَﺔ‬ ‫ــِييـِن‬
Ownership
One way to express belonging is to add a posessive pronoun to the end of a noun. See ownership
for information about other methods. Here are some examples:
English on its own with pronoun

kitaeb kitaebuh
his book
‫ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬ ‫ﻛـِﺘﺎ َﺑـُﻪ‬
miraaty
my wife does not exist on its own
‫ﻣـِﺮا َﺗﻲ‬
fikra fikritak
your(m) idea
‫ﻓـِﻜﺮ َة‬ ‫ﻓـِﻜﺮ ِﺗـَﻚ‬
Compound nouns
You can describe a noun using another noun, for example to say what material it is made from. The
qualifying noun is always singular. If the main noun is preceded by il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬the qualifying noun is also
preceded by il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬. Note that adding il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬to a word affects the pronunciation if it begins with a sun
letter.
English Arabic
kys blastik
a plastic bag
‫ﻛﯿﺲ ﺑﻼ َﺳﺘـِﻚ‬
ilkys ilblastik
the plastic bag
‫ا ِﻟﻜﯿﺲ ا ِﻟﺒﻼ َﺳﺘـِﻚ‬
'akyaes blastik
plastic bags
‫أﻛﯿﺎ َس ﺑﻼ َﺳﺘـِﻚ‬
il'akyaes ilblastik
the plastic bags
‫ا ِﻷﻛﯿﺎ َس ا ِﻟﺒﻼ َﺳﺘـِﻚ‬
Pronouns
Pronouns are short words that are used to replace nouns in spoken English and Arabic, to make
our speech clearer and more concise. In this example, Ahmed is the noun and He is the pronoun:
Ahmed has a dog. He walks with it every day
aacHmad Aand-uh kalb wa huwwa biyitmashshY maAa-uh kul ywm
There are four main groups of pronoun:
personal pronouns - I, you, he, etc

demonstrative pronouns - this, that
indefinite pronouns - somebody, anywhere
relative pronouns - who, which, that
Personal pronouns
In English, there are four versions of the personal pronoun (he, him, his, himself): in Egyptian, there
is an additional version (to him).
English Egyptian Form

huwwa
he subject
-uh
him object
‫ــُه‬
-luh
to him indirect object
‫ـﻠـُﻪ‬
-uh
-uh
his posessive
‫ــُه‬
nafsuh
himself reflexive
‫ﻧـَﻔﺴـُﻪ‬
In Egyptian, there are separate forms of you for masculine, feminine and plural, but there is no
neuter (it): instead, it is necessary to use the he or she form, depending on the gender of the noun
Subject pronouns
A subject is the noun that appears before the verb- the person or thing that is doing something.
I like to read
aacnaa baaHib aacktib
The subject pronouns are:
English Egyptian
'ana
I
‫أﻧَﺎ‬
'ihna
we
‫إﺣﻨَﺎ‬
'inta
you(m)
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬
'inti
you(f)
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬
'intu
you(pl)
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬
huwwa
he/it(m)
hiya
she/it(f)
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬
humma
they
‫ﻫُـ ﱠﻢ‬
Personal pronouns are not needed with verbs, as it is clear from the verb, but it is common to use
them, especially for emphasis. They are often used with participles.
Object pronoun suffixes
You can attach an object pronoun (for example me or him) as a suffix to an imperative, verb or
participle. to refer to the object.
give me the knife
iicddyny iil-sikkynao
The object suffixes are similar to posessive suffixes on nouns:
English Suffix
-ni
me
‫ﻦ‬
ِ‫ـ‬
-na
us
‫ﻦ‬
َ‫ـ‬
-ak
You(m)
‫ــَك‬
-ik
You(f)
‫ــِك‬
-kum
You(pl)
‫ـﻜـُﻢ‬
-u
Him/it(m)
‫ُـ‬
-ha
Her/if(f)
‫ـ َﻪ‬
-hum
Them
‫ـﻬـُﻢ‬
‫ـﻬـُﻢ‬
If there is an I before the last consonant and the suffix starts with a vowel, the -i- is dropped, so...
possessive pronoun suffix
Things that would be expressed using a posessive pronoun (my, your... etc) in English can be
handled using a possessive suffix attached to the noun, or using bitaA ‫ﺑـِﺘـَﻊ‬. The latter is used for
most imported words.
what (is) your name?
iicsm-ak iicyh?
The posessive pronouns themselves are pretty easy to learn, but when the pronouns are attached
to nouns, the vowels do a little dance to make sure that you don't get three consonants in a row.
Here are examples for nouns that end with one or two consonants:
Nouns ending in two consonants

English after -C after -CC
saahib kalb
‫ﺻﺎ َﺣـِﺐ‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺐ‬
-y saahiby -y kalby
my
‫ـﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺎ َﺣـِﺒﻲ‬ ‫ـﻲ‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺒﻲ‬
-na saahibna -ina kalbina
our
‫ﺻﺎ َﺣـِﺒﻨَﺎ ـﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ــِنَا‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺒـِﻨَﺎ‬
-ak saahibak -ak kalbak
your(m)
‫ﺻﺎ َﺣـِﺒـَﻚ ــَك‬ ‫ــَك‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺒـَﻚ‬
-ik saahibik -ik kalbik
your(f)
‫ﺻﺎ َﺣـِﺒـِﻚ ــِك‬ ‫ــِك‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺒـِﻚ‬
-kum saahibkum -ukum kalbukum
your(pl)
‫ﺻﺎ َﺣـِﺒﻜـُﻢ ـﻜـُﻢ‬ ‫ــُكـُم‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺒـُﻜـُﻢ‬
-uh saahibuh -uh kalbuh
his/its(m)
‫ــُه‬ ‫ﺻﺎ َﺣـِﺒـُﻪ‬ ‫ــُه‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺒـُﻪ‬
-ha saahibha -aha kalbaha
her/its(f)
‫ـﻬَﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﺎ َﺣـِﺒﻬَﺎ‬ ‫ــَهَا‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺒـَﻬَﺎ‬
-hum saahibhum -uhum kalbuhum
their
‫ﺻﺎ َﺣـِﺒﻬـُﻢ ـﻬـُﻢ‬ ‫ــُهـُم‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺒـُﻬـُﻢ‬
For nouns ending in -a ‫ــَة‬, the -a ‫ ــَة‬is replaced by -t ‫ ـﺖ‬or -it ‫ ــِت‬and then the ending is added.
Nouns ending in -a ‫ــَة‬

English after -C after -CC
kura shanta
‫ﻛﻮر َة‬ ‫ﺷـَﻨﻄـَﺔ‬
-ty kurty -ity shantity
my
‫ـﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺗﻲ‬ ‫ــِتي‬ ‫ﺷـَﻨﻄـِﺘﻲ‬
-itna kuritna -itna shantitna
our
‫ﻛﻮر ِﺗﻨَﺎ ــِتنَا‬ ‫ــِتنَا‬ ‫ﺷـَﻨﻄـِﺘﻨَﺎ‬
-tak kurtak -itak shantitak
your(m)
‫ـﺘـَﻚ‬ ‫ــِتـَك ﻛﻮرﺗـَﻚ‬ ‫ﺷـَﻨﻄـِﺘـَﻚ‬
-tik kurtik -itik shantitik
your(f)
‫ـﺘـِﻚ‬ ‫ــِتـِك ﻛﻮرﺗـِﻚ‬ ‫ﺷـَﻨﻄـِﺘـِﻚ‬
-itkum kuritkum -itkum shantitkum
your(pl)
‫ﻛﻮر ِﺗﻜـُﻢ ــِتكـُم‬ ‫ــِتكـُم‬ ‫ﺷـَﻨﻄـِﺘﻜـُﻢ‬
-tuh kurtuh -ituh shantituh
his/its(m)
‫ـﺘـُﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺗـُﻪ‬ ‫ــِتـُه‬ ‫ﺷـَﻨﻄـِﺘـُﻪ‬
-itha kuritha -itha shantitha
her/its(f)
‫ــِتهَا‬ ‫ﻛﻮر ِﺗﻬَﺎ‬ ‫ــِتهَا‬ ‫ﺷـَﻨﻄـِﺘﻬَﺎ‬
-ithum kurithum -ithum shantithum
their
‫ﻛﻮر ِﺗﻬـُﻢ ــِتهـُم‬ ‫ــِتهـُم‬ ‫ﺷـَﻨﻄـِﺘﻬـُﻢ‬
Nouns that end in alif -a ‫ ـَﺎ‬are treated almost like feminine nouns, ie the alif is replaced by -it ‫ـﺎ ِت‬
and then the ending is added.
Nouns ending in -y ‫ ـﻲ‬or -w ‫ ـﻮ‬are listed below.
Note that for most words ending in -w ‫ـﻮ‬, for example baltw ‫ﺑـَﻠﺘﻮ‬, one would normally use bitaA ‫ﺑـِﺘـَﻊ‬
rather than a posessive suffix.
Nouns ending in a vowel

-a -y -w
English
‫ـَﺎ‬ ‫ـﻲ‬ ‫ـﻮ‬
vyla kursy Aadw
‫ﻼ‬
َ ‫ڤﯿ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺪو‬
-ya vylity kursya Aadwy
my
‫ﻲ‬
َ‫ـ‬ ‫ڤﯿﻼ ِﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺳﯿَﺎ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺪوي‬
-na vylitna kursyna Aadwna
our
‫ڤﯿﻼ ِﺗﻨَﺎ ـﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺳﯿﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺪوﻧَﺎ‬
-k vylitak kursyk Aadwk
your(m)
‫ڤﯿﻼ ِﺗـَﻚ ـﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺳﯿﻚ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺪوك‬
-ki vylitik kursyky Aadwik
your(f)
‫ﻚ‬
ِ ‫ڤﯿﻼ ِﺗـِﻚ ـ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺳﯿﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺪو ِك‬
-kum vylitkum kursykum Aadwkum
your(pl)
‫ڤﯿﻼ ِﺗﻜـُﻢ ـﻜـُﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺳﯿﻜـُﻢ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺪوﻛـُﻢ‬
-h vylituh kursyh Aadwh
-h vylituh kursyh Aadwh
his/its(m)
‫ـﻪ‬ ‫ڤﯿﻼ ِﺗـُﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺳﯿﻪ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺪوه‬
-ha vylitha kursyha Aadwha
her/its(f)
‫ـﻬَﺎ‬ ‫ڤﯿﻼ ِﺗﻬَﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺳﯿﻬَﺎ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺪوﻫَﺎ‬
-hum vylithum kursyhum Aadwhum
their
‫ڤﯿﻼ ِﺗﻬـُﻢ ـﻬـُﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻮرﺳﯿﻬـُﻢ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺪوﻫـُﻢ‬
Father and brother 'abb ‫ب‬

ّ ‫ أ‬and brother 'achch ‫خ‬
ّ ‫ أ‬become 'abw- ‫ أﺑﻮـ‬and brother 'achw- ‫ أﺧﻮـ‬when a
possessive pronoun is added.
father brother
English
aacbb aacKK
'abwya 'achwya
my
‫أﺑﻮﯾَﺎ‬ ‫أﺧﻮﯾَﺎ‬
'abuna 'achuna
our
‫أﺑﻮﻧَﺎ‬ ‫أﺧﻮﻧَﺎ‬
'abuk 'achuk
your(m)
‫أﺑﻮك‬ ‫أﺧﻮك‬
'abuky 'achuky
your(f)
‫أﺑﻮﻛﻲ‬ ‫أﺧﻮﻛﻲ‬
'abukum 'achukum
your(pl)
your(pl)
‫أﺑﻮﻛـُﻢ‬ ‫أﺧﻮﻛـُﻢ‬
'abuh 'achuh
his/its(m)
‫أﺑﻮه‬ ‫أﺧﻮه‬
'abuha 'achuha
her/its(f)
‫أﺑﻮﻫَﺎ‬ ‫أﺧﻮﻫَﺎ‬
'abuhum 'achuhum
their
‫أﺑﻮﻫـُﻢ‬ ‫أﺧﻮﻫـُﻢ‬
reflexive pronouns (myself, yourself, himself)
Reflexive pronouns can be used after a noun or a verb.
English Egyptian
haechud baly min nafsy
I can look after myself
‫ﻫﺎ َﺧـُﺪ ﺑﺎ َﻟﻲ ﻣـِﻦ ﻧـَﻔﺴﻲ‬
irraagil nafsuh
The man himself
‫ا ِﻟﺮا َﺟـِﻞ ﻧـَﻔﺴـُﻪ‬
huwwa Aaemalha binafsuh
He did it by himself
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻋﺎ َﻣـَﻠﻪ َ ﺑـِﻨـَﻔﺴـُﻪ‬
Demonstrative pronouns
These are the words that you use when you want to point at something.
English Egyptian
dah
this (man)
‫د َه‬
dy
this (woman, thing)
‫دي‬
dul
those (men)
‫دول‬
dyh
those (women,things)
‫دﯾﻪ‬
If you want to use one of these with a noun, to indicate which one, (for example, this book), you
should use a Demonstrative adjective. Fortunately, in both English an Egyptian, the demonstrative
pronouns are the same as the demonstrative adjectives. Note that, when using demonstrative
adjectives in Egyptian, the noun retains its il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬prefix.
demonstrative English Egyptian

bikaem dah
pronoun how much is this
‫ﺑـِﻜﺎ َم د َه‬
bikaem ilkitaeb dah
pronoun how much is this book
‫ﺑـِﻜﺎ َم ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب د َه‬
‫ﺑـِﻜﺎ َم ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب د َه‬
Indefinite pronouns
These are words like anybody, something etc. In Egyptian, these are made up of two words, but
they are used in exactly the same way as in English.
English Egyptian
hadd
somebody
‫ﺣَـ ّﺪ‬
'ay hadd
anybody
‫أي ﺣَـ ّﺪ‬
wala hadd
nobody
‫و َﻻ َ ﺣَـ ّﺪ‬
haega
something
‫ﺣﺎ َﺟـَﺔ‬
'ay haega
anything
‫أي ﺣﺎ َﺟـَﺔ‬
wala haega
nothing
‫و َﻻ َ ﺣﺎ َﺟـَﺔ‬
makaen
somewhere
‫ﻣـَﻜﺎ َن‬
'ay makaen
anywhere
‫أي ﻣـَﻜﺎ َن‬
wala makaen
nowhere
‫و َﻻ َ ﻣـَﻜﺎ َن‬
Relative pronoun
The relative pronoun illy ‫ ا ِﻟّﻲ‬is used to represent that, who and which
the left turn that is coming (ie the next left)

iil-yimyn iilly gayy
the man who lives here
iil-raagil iilly saakin hinaa
Adjectives
Adjectives can be used in two ways: to describe something, or to specify which one of several you
are talking about.
English Egyptian
kiryza hamra
describe a cherry is red
‫ﻛـِﺮﯾﺰ َة ﺣـَﻤﺮَا‬
ilkura hamra
describe the ball is red
‫ا ِﻟﻜﻮر َة ﺣـَﻤﺮَا‬
Aaeyiz kura hamra
describe I want a red ball
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ ﻛﻮر َة ﺣـَﻤﺮَا‬
Aaeyiz ilkura ilhamra
specify I want the red ball
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ ا ِﻟﻜﻮر َة ا ِﻟﺤـَﻤﺮ َة‬
ilkitaeb kibyr
describe the book is big
‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ﻛـِﺒﯿﺮ‬
'araa't kitaeb kibyr
describe I have read a big book
‫ﻗـَﺮا َءت ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب ﻛـِﺒﯿﺮ‬
'araa't ilkitaeb ilkibyr
specify I have read the big book ‫ﻗـَﺮا َءت ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا‬
‫ِلكـِبير‬
irraagil 'aAma
describe the man is blind
‫ا ِﻟﺮا َﺟـِﻞ أﻋﻤﻰ‬
raagil 'aAma barra
describe a blind man is outside
‫را َﺟـِﻞ أﻋﻤﻰ ﺑَـﺮﱠا‬
irraagil il'aAma barra
specify the blind man is outside
‫ا ِﻟﺮا َﺟـِﻞ ا ِﻷﻋﻤﻰ ﺑَـﺮﱠا‬
In English, when you use an adjective to specify which one of several you are talking about, you put
the word the in front of the adjective. It is almost the same in Egyptian, but you put il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬before
both the adjective and the noun: the il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬before the adjective is the one that means that the
adjective is specifying which one you mean. Note that adding il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬to a word affects the
pronunciation if it begins with a sun letter.
Masculine, feminine, plural
In english, there is only one form of an adjective, but in Egyptian, most adjectives must agree in
gender and number with the noun that they relate to. Here are some examples:
English Egyptian
irraagil shaatir
the man is clever
‫ا ِﻟﺮا َﺟـِﻞ ﺷﺎ َﻃـِﺮ‬
issitt shaatrah
the woman is clever
‫ﺖ ﺷﺎ َﻃﺮ َه‬
il'atfael shaatiryn
the children are clever ‫ا ِﻷﻃﻔﺎ َل ﺷﺎ‬
‫َطـِرين‬
The following table shows some typical feminine and plural forms:
English Egyptian
masculine feminine plural
-ah -yn
‫ــَه‬ ‫ـﯿﻦ‬
kibyr kibyrah kubaar
big
‫ﻛـِﺒﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻛـِﺒﯿﺮ َه‬ ‫ﻛـُﺒﺎ َر‬
kuwayis kuwayisah kuwayisyn
good
‫ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺲ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺴـَﻪ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺴﯿﻦ‬
'ahmar hamrah humr
red
‫أﺣﻤـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺣـَﻤﺮ َه‬ ‫ﺣـُﻤﺮ‬
sahl sahlah sahlyn
easy
‫ﺳـَﻬﻞ‬ ‫ﺳـَﻬﻠـَﻪ‬ ‫ﺳـَﻬﻠﯿﻦ‬
latyf latyfah lutaaf
nice
‫ﻟـَﻄﯿﻒ‬ ‫ﻟـَﻄﯿﻔـَﻪ‬ ‫ﻟـُﻄﺎ َف‬
faady faadyah faadyyin
free
‫ﻓﺎ َﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ َﺿﯿـَﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ َﺿﯿﯿـِﻦ‬
bunny bunny bunny
brown
‫ﺑُـﻨّﻲ‬ ‫ﺑُـﻨّﻲ‬ ‫ﺑُـﻨّﻲ‬
The feminine form of most adjectives is made by adding the suffix -ah ‫ــَه‬, and the plural is formed by
adding the suffix -yn ‫ـﯿﻦ‬. Note that adding a suffix may affect the pronunciation.
We will look at some of the common exceptions later. Note that some words, for example brown
bunny ‫ ﺑُـﻨّﻲ‬are invariable- you use the same form for masculine, feminine and plural.
Countries
A country name is usually converted to an adjective by adding -y ‫ـﻲ‬. This can be used to refer to a
person, a language or something from a country.
English Country m f pl
-y -iya iyyin
‫ـﻲ‬ ‫ــِيـَة‬ ِ‫ﯾﯿِـﻦ‬
masr masry masriya masriyyin
Egypt
‫ﻣـَﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻣـَﺼﺮي‬ ‫ﻣـَﺼﺮ ِﯾـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻣـَﺼﺮ ِﯾﯿـِﻦ‬
ilyunaen yunany yunaeniya yunaeniyyin
Greece
‫ا ِﻟﯿﻮﻧﺎ َن‬ ‫ﯾﻮﻧﺎ َﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﯾﻮﻧﺎ َﻧـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﯾﻮﻧﺎ َﻧـِﯿﯿـِﻦ‬
'iytalya 'iytaly 'iytalya 'iytalyyin
Italy
‫إﯾﻄﺎ َﻟﯿَﺎ‬ ‫إﯾﻄﺎ َﻟﻲ‬ ‫إﯾﻄﺎ َﻟﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫إﯾﻄﺎ َﻟﯿﯿـِﻦ‬
issiwyd siwydy siwydya siwydyyin
Sweden
‫ا ِﻟﺴـِﻮﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺳـِﻮﯾﺪي‬ ‫ﺳـِﻮﯾﺪﯾـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺳـِﻮﯾﺪﯾﯿـِﻦ‬
ishshimael shimaly shimaeliya shimaeliyyin
the North
‫ا ِﻟﺸـِﻤﺎ َل‬ ‫ﺷـِﻤﺎ َﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺷـِﻤﺎ َﻟـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺷـِﻤﺎ َﻟـِﯿﯿـِﻦ‬
'uurubbiyyin
'uurubba 'uurubby 'uurubbiya
Europe ‫أ ُور‬
‫أ ُور ُﺑﱠﺎ‬ ‫أ ُوروﺑّﻲ‬ ‫أ ُوروﺑﱢـﯿـَﺔ‬
‫بـِييـِن‬
ّ ُ
Irregular ones...
ilhind hindy hindya hunud
India
‫ا ِﻟﻬـِﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻫـِﻨﺪي‬ ‫ﻫـِﻨﺪﯾـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻫـُﻨﻮد‬
'amryka 'amryky ‫(أﻣﺮﯾﻜﻲ‬people) amrikiya amrykaen
America
‫أﻣﺮﯾﻜَﺎ‬ 'amrikany ‫( أﻣﺮ ِﻛﺎ َﻧﻲ‬things) ‫ا َﻣﺮ ِﻛـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ا َﻣﺮﯾﻜﺎ َن‬
For some countries eg England, the adjective is made from the collective noun. Here are some
examples:
English Country m f collective noun

-y -iya
‫ـﻲ‬ ‫ــِيـَة‬
'ingiltira 'ingilyzy 'ingilyziyah 'ingilyz
England
‫إﻧﺠـِﻠﯿﺰ ِﯾـَﻪ إﻧﺠـِﻠﯿﺰي إﻧﺠـِﻠﺘـِﺮَا‬ ‫إﻧﺠـِﻠﯿﺰ‬
Aaraby Aaraby Aarabiyah Aarab
Arabia
‫ﻋـَﺮ َﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺮ َﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺮ َﺑـِﯿـَﻪ‬ ‫ﻋـَﺮ َب‬
rusya rusy rusyah rus
Russia
‫روﺳﯿَﺎ‬ ‫روﺳﻲ‬ ‫روﺳﯿـَﻪ‬ ‫روس‬
'almanya 'almany 'almanyah 'almaen
Germany
‫أﻟﻤﺎ َﻧﯿَﺎ‬ ‫أﻟﻤﺎ َﻧﻲ‬ ‫أﻟﻤﺎ َﻧﯿـَﻪ‬ ‫أﻟﻤﺎ َن‬
'asbanya 'asbany 'asbanyah 'asbaen
Spain
‫أﺳﺒﺎ َﻧﯿَﺎ‬ ‫أﺳﺒﺎ َﻧﻲ‬ ‫أﺳﺒﺎ َﻧﯿـَﻪ‬ ‫أﺳﺒﺎ َن‬
For countries ending in two consonants and alif, the ending is -awy ‫ـﺎ َوي‬.
English Country m f pl
-awy -awiya -awiyyin
‫ـﺎ َوي‬ ‫ـﺎ َو ِﯾـَﺔ‬ ‫ـﺎ َو ِﯾﯿﺎ ِن‬
innimsa nimsaewy nimsawiyyah nimsawiyyin
Austria
‫ا ِﻟﻨـِﻤﺴَﺎ‬ ‫ﻧـِﻤﺴﺎ َوي‬ ‫ﻧـِﻤﺴـَﻮ ِﯾﯿـَﻪ‬ ‫ﻧـِﻤﺴـَﻮ ِﯾﯿـِﻦ‬
faransa faransaewy faransawiyah faransawiyyin
France
‫ﻓـَﺮ َﻧﺴَﺎ‬ ‫ﻓـَﺮ َﻧﺴﺎ َوي‬ ‫ﻓـَﺮ َﻧﺴـَﻮ ِﯾـَﻪ‬ ‫ﻓـَﺮ َﻧﺴـَﻮ ِﯾﯿـِﻦ‬
One common usage of the country adjective is to talk about a person from that country. Here are
some examples:
English Egyptian
waehid masry
an Egyptian man
‫وا َﺣـِﺪ ﻣـَﺼﺮي‬
wahda masrya
an Egyptian woman
‫وا َﺣﺪ َة ﻣـَﺼﺮﯾـَﺔ‬
waehid 'ingilizy
waehid 'ingilizy
an englishman
‫وا َﺣـِﺪ إﻧﺠـِﻠـِﺰي‬
wahda 'ingilyzya
an englishwoman
‫وا َﺣﺪ َة إﻧﺠـِﻠﯿﺰﯾـَﺔ‬
waehid faransawy
a frenchman
‫وا َﺣـِﺪ ﻓـَﺮ َﻧﺴـَﻮي‬
wahda faransawiya
a frenchwoman
‫وا َﺣﺪ َة ﻓـَﺮ َﻧﺴـَﻮ ِﯾـَﺔ‬
The feminine and plural are used only for people. For inanimate objects, the masculine form only is
used. Here are some examples:
English Egyptian
markib yunany
a greek boat
‫ﻣـَﺮﻛـِﺐ ﯾﻮﻧﺎ َﻧﻲ‬
gibna faransaewy
French cheese
‫ﺟـِﺒﻨـَﺔ ﻓـَﺮ َﻧﺴﺎ َوي‬
ilAarabiyaet 'amrikany
american cars ‫ا ِﻟﻌـَﺮ َﺑـِﯿﺎ َت أﻣﺮ ِﻛﺎ‬
‫َني‬
Colours
The main colours follow a pattern. Here are some examples:
English m f pl
C=consonant aCCaC CaCCah CuCC
'abyad biyda biyd
white
‫أﺑﯿـَﺾ‬ ‫ﺑـِﯿﻀَﺎ‬ ‫ﺑـِﯿﺾ‬
'iswid suda suwd
black
‫إﺳﻮ ِد‬ ‫ﺳﻮدَا‬ ‫ﺳـُﻮد‬
'asfar safra sufr
yellow
‫أﺻﻔـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺻـُﻔﺮ ﺻـَﻔﺮَا‬
'azra' zar'ah zur'
blue
‫أزر َق‬ ‫ز َرﻗـَﻪ‬ ‫ز ُرق‬
'achdar chadra chudr
green
‫أﺧﻀـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺧـُﻀﺮ ﺧـَﻀﺮَا‬
'ahmar hamra humr
red
‫أﺣﻤـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺣـَﻤﺮَا‬ ‫ﺣـُﻤﺮ‬
Colours derived from a material or thing just have a -y ‫ ـﻲ‬added. They are invariable: the feminine
and plural form is the same as the masculine form.
English m/f/pl
brown bunny
coffee ‫ﺑُـﻨّﻲ‬
zahaby
golden
‫ذ َﻫـَﺒﻲ‬
faddy
silver
‫ﻓَـﻀّﻲ‬
nahasy
copper
‫ﻧـَﺤﺎ َﺳﻲ‬
rumady
light grey
‫ر ُﻣﺎ َدي‬
dark grey rusaasy
lead ‫ر ُﺻﺎ َﺻﻲ‬
dark green zyty
olive ‫زﯾﺘﻲ‬
kuhly
dark blue
‫ﻛـُﺤﻠﻲ‬
labany
pale blue
‫ﻟـَﺒـَﻨﻲ‬
nibyty pdfcrowd.com
dark red nibyty
wine ‫ﻧـِﺒﯿﺘﻲ‬
kastanae'yy
chestnut
‫ﻛـَﺴﺘـَﻨﺎ َﺋﻲ‬
light brown Aasaly
honey ‫ﻋـَﺴـَﻠﻲ‬
purple banafsigy
violet ‫ﺑـَﻨـَﻔﺴـِﺠﻲ‬
burtu'aly
orange
‫ﺑـُﺮﺗـُﻘﺎ َﻟﻲ‬
deep purple bitangany
aubergine ‫ﺑـِﺘـَﻨﺠﺎ َﻧﻲ‬
Personal attributes
Personal attributes or disabilities follow the same pattern as the basic colours:
English m f pl
C=consonant aCCaC CaCCah CuCC
'ahbal habla hubl
foolish
‫أﻫﺒـَﻞ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺒﻠـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻫـُﺒﻞ‬
'ahwal hulaa' huwl
squinting
‫أﺣﻮ َل‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻻ َء‬ ‫ﺣـُﻮل‬
'a'raA 'arAa 'urA
bald
‫أﻗﺮ َع‬ ‫ﻗـَﺮﻋـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻗـُﺮع‬
'aslaA salAaa' sulA
bald
‫أﺻﻠـَﻊ‬ ‫ﺻـَﻠﻌﺎ َء‬ ‫ﺻـُﻠﻊ‬
fair skin 'ash'ar sha'ara shu'r
blonde ‫أﺷﻘـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺷـَﻘـَﺮ َة‬ ‫ﺷـُﻘﺮ‬
dark skin 'asmar samra sumr
brunette ‫أﺳﻤـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺳـَﻤﺮ َة‬ ‫ﺳـُﻤﺮ‬
'akrat karta kurt
frizzy haired
‫أﻛﺮ َت‬ ‫ﻛـُﺮت ﻛـَﺮﺗـَﺔ‬
'ashwal shula shul
left handed
‫أﺷﻮ َل‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻟـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻮل‬
'ayman yimna yumn
right handed
‫أﯾﻤـَﻦ‬ ‫ﯾـِﻤﻨـَﺔ‬ ‫ﯾـُﻤﻦ‬
'aArag Aarga Aurg
lame
‫أﻋﺮ َج‬ ‫ﻋـُﺮج ﻋـَﺮﺟـَﺔ‬
'aAma Aamya Aumy
blind
‫أﻋﻤﻰ‬ ‫ﻋـَﻤﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻋـُﻤﻲ‬
'atrash turshaa' tursh
deaf
‫ﻃـُﺮش ﻃـُﺮﺷﺎ َء أﻃﺮ َش‬
'asam samaa' summ
deaf
‫أﺻـَﻢ‬ ‫ﺻـَﻤﺎ َء‬ ‫ﺻُـ ّﻢ‬
'achras charsa churs
mute
‫أﺧﺮ َس‬ ‫ﺧـُﺮس ﺧـَﺮﺳـَﺔ‬
Slightly, Very... Extremely...
The following adverbs can be placed after the adjective:
English Egyptian
shwaya
slightly
‫ﺷﻮ َﯾـَﺔ‬
bi'iAtidael
moderately
‫ﺑـِﺈﻋﺘـِﺪا َل‬
'awy
very
‫ﻗـَﻮي‬
chaalis
extremely
‫ﺧﺎ َﻟـِﺺ‬
giddaen
giddaen
‫ا‬‫ﺟِـﺪ‬
Aail'achir
‫ﻋـَﺎ ِﻷﺧـِﺮ‬
'awy
too
‫ﻗـَﻮي‬
Here are some examples:
English Egyptian
ilAarabiya 'itdarrarit shwaya
the car is slightly damaged
‫ا ِﻟﻌـَﺮ َﺑـِﯿـَﺔ إﺗﻀَـ ّﺮ َر ِت ﺷﻮ َﯾـَﺔ‬
issigaeda kaenit Galya 'awy
the carpet was very expensive ‫ا ِﻟﺴـِﺠﺎ َد َة ﻛﺎ َﻧـِﺖ ﻏﺎ َﻟﯿـَﺔ‬
‫ﻗـَﻮي‬
huwwa Gany giddaen
he is extremely rich
‫ا‬‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻏـَﻨﻲ ﺟِـﺪ‬
ilbiyt dih kibyr 'awy
this house is too big
‫ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ د ِه ﻛـِﺒﯿﺮ ﻗـَﻮي‬
You may have noticed that the word qawy has two meanings: very and too. This sometimes
causes confusion when Egyptians speak english: they say, for example, too much when they
mean very much.
Comparatives
In english we take an adjective like big and add suffixes -er to make comparative bigger and -est
to make the superlative biggest. In Egyptian there is one word, a comparative, that is used for both.
The context indicates the meaning.
We can compare two things using min ‫ﻣـِﻦ‬:
English Egyptian
'ahmad 'atwal minny
Ahmad is taller than me
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ أﻃﻮ َل ﻣِـﻨّﻲ‬
huwwa 'aGba min makunt faekir
he is more stupid than I thought
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ أﻏﺒﻰ ﻣـِﻦ ﻣـَﻜـُﻨﺖ ﻓﺎ َﻛـِﺮ‬
We can also make comparison without specifying the second thing like this:
English Egyptian
'ahmad 'atwal bikityr
Ahmad is a lot taller
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ أﻃﻮ َل ﺑـِﻜـِﺘﯿﺮ‬
ilgaww haykun 'ahsan shuwaya bukra
the weather will be a little better tomorrow
‫ا ِﻟﺠَـ ّﻮ ﺣـَﯿﻜﻮن أﺣﺴـَﻦ ﺷـُﻮ َﯾـَﺔ ﺑـُﻜﺮ َة‬
For the superlative (best, biggest) the comparative is used immediately before a noun:
English Egyptian
muhammad 'atwal taalib
mohammed is the tallest student
‫ﻣـُﺤَـﻤﱠـﺪ أﻃﻮ َل ﻃﺎ َﻟـِﺐ‬
huwwa 'asGar walad
he is the youngest boy
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ أﺻﻐـَﺮ و َﻟـَﺪ‬
ittaalib il'atwal tuluh mitr 1 wa 90 santy
the tallest student is 1m90 ٩٠ َ ‫ و‬١ ‫ا ِﻟﻄﺎ َﻟـِﺐ ا ِﻷﻃﻮ َل ﻃﻮﻟﻮه ﻣـِﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺳـَﻨﺘﻲ‬
ilmashrub il'aGla 20 ginyh
the most expensive drink is 20 pounds
‫ ﺟـِﻨﯿﻪ‬٢٠ ‫ا ِﻟﻤـَﺸﺮوب ا ِﻷﻏﻠﻰ‬
dih 'ahla fustaen fy ilmahal
this is the prettiest dress in the shop
‫د ِه أﺣﻠﻰ ﻓـُﺴﺘﺎ َن ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟﻤـَﺤـَﻞ‬
kaen 'ahsan yum fy hayaty
it was the best day in my life
‫ﻛﺎ َن أﺣﺴـَﻦ ﯾﻮم ﻓﻲ ﺣـَﯿﺎ َﺗﻲ‬
Making comparatives
As you may have noticed from the previous examples, the comparative is often derived from the
adjective as follows:
English adjective comparative
kibyr 'akbar
big
‫ﻛـِﺒﯿﺮ‬ ‫أﻛﺒـَﺮ‬
sahl 'ashal
easy
‫ﺳـَﻬﻞ‬ ‫أﺳﻬـَﻞ‬
tawyl 'atwal
tall
‫ﻃـَﻮﯾﻞ‬ ‫أﻃﻮ َل‬
raqy 'arqa
classy
‫را َﻗﻲ‬ ‫أرﻗﻰ‬
exceptions
kuwayyis 'ahsan
good
‫ﻛـُﻮ َﯾﯿـِﺲ‬ ‫أﺣﺴـَﻦ‬
For adjectives with two consonants and ending in -y ‫ ـﻲ‬or -w ‫ـﻮ‬, the final letter changes to alif-layena
-a ‫ـﻰ‬.

hilw 'ahla
pretty
‫ﺣـِﻠﻮ‬ ‫أﺣﻠﻰ‬
Galy 'aGla
expensive
expensive
‫ﻏﺎ َﻟﻲ‬ ‫أﻏﻠﻰ‬
Aaly 'aAla
loud/high
‫ﻋﺎ َﻟﻲ‬ ‫أﻋﻠﻰ‬
Gany 'aGna
rich
‫ﻏـَﻨﻲ‬ ‫أﻏﻨﻰ‬
sahy
healthy no comp
‫ﺻـَﺤﻲ‬
Gaby 'aGba
stupid
‫ﻏـَﺒﻲ‬ ‫أﻏﺒﻰ‬
zaky 'azka
clever
‫ذ َﻛﻲ‬ ‫أذﻛﻰ‬
For adjectives with three consonants where the last two consonants are the same, the middle vowel
is replaced with a fatha -a ‫َـ‬.

gadd
serious no comp
‫ﺟَـ ّﺪ‬
gidyd 'agdad
new
‫ﺟـِﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫أﺟﺪ َد‬
muhimm 'ahamm
important
‫ﻣـُﻬِـ ّﻢ‬ ‫أﻫَـ ّﻢ‬
Aadyd
numerous no comp
‫ﻋـَﺪﯾﺪ‬
mahzuz
lucky no comp
‫ﻣـَﺤﻈﻮظ‬
mahbub 'ahabb
popular
‫ﻣـَﺤﺒﻮب‬ ‫ﺐ‬
ّ ‫أﺣَـ‬
chafyf 'achaff
light
‫ﺧـَﻔﯿﻒ‬ ‫ﻒ‬
ّ ‫أﺧَـ‬
lazyz 'alazz
delicious
‫ﻟـَﺬﯾﺬ‬ ‫أﻟَـ ّﺬ‬
'alayil 'a'ael
few
‫ﻗـَﻠـَﯿـِﻞ‬ ‫أﻗﺎ َل‬
In English, it is not possible to make a comparative in the usual way from some adjectives, for
example interesting: instead, we say more interesting. The same is true in Egyptian: the words
'aktar ‫ أﻛﺘـَﺮ‬- more and 'a'ael ‫ أﻗﺎ َل‬- less are used with the adjective. Here are examples of adjectives
that are handled this way
Group English Egyptian

participles ilAa'd ma'bul 'aktar kidah
the contract is more acceptable like
beginning with m-
‫ﻣـ‬
this ‫ا ِﻟﻌـَﻘﺪ ﻣـَﻘﺒﻮل أﻛﺘـَﺮ ﻛـِﺪ َه‬
participles 'ana ta'lidy 'a'ael minnak
beginning with ta- I am less traditional than you
‫ﺗَـ‬
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﺗـَﻘﻠـِﺪي أﻗﺎ َل ﻣِـﻨﱠـﻚ‬
huwwa biyib'a 'anany 'aktar kul
adjectives yum
he gets more selfish every day
beginning with 'a- ‫أـ‬
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺑـِﯿـِﺒﻘﺎ َ أﻧﺎ َﻧﻲ أﻛﺘـَﺮ ﻛـُﻞ ﯾﻮم‬
adjectives saara taAbaena 'aktar min 'ahmad
Sarah is more tired than Ahmed
ending with -an ‫ـًﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺎ َر َة ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َﻧـَﺔ أﻛﺘـَﺮ ﻣـِﻦ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
Verbs
A verb tells you what is happening- for example, reading, walking etc. In Egyptian, the general
meaning of a word is defined by the consonants, and several related words may contain this set of
letters. For example, the letters ktb are used to make the words write, type, book, writer, written,
writing, office and desk. The exact meaning is affected by the vowels, prefixes and suffixes (extra
bits at the beginning and the end). Here are some of the ways the exact meaning can change for
verbs:
tense - when something happens (past, present, future)

case - who is doing it (I, you, he, etc)
mode - must, could etc
pronouns - who is doing it, who is having it done to them
negation - say something is NOT happening
The examples that follow use the verb katab ‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺐ‬, which means write: about 30% of verbs follow
this pattern, and there are probably about three or four other patterns.
The web site www.lisaanmasry.com and the windows and Android apps that you can download
from the web site all provides full details for the majority of verbs.
Pronouns
There are three main types of pronouns that can be used with verbs:
subject - I, we, you, he, she, it, they

object - me, us, you, him, her, it, them
indirect object - to me, to us, to you, to him, to her, to it, to them
In Egyptian, the subject pronoun is a separate word before the verb: the object and indirect object
pronouns are attached to the end of the verb. Here are a some examples:
Pronoun English Arabic

'ana Aaarif 'ahmad
Subject I know Ahmed
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِف أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
'ana Aaarifuh
Subject, object I know him
'ahmad shaefha 'imbaarih
Object Ahmed saw her yesterday
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺷﺎ َﻓﻬﺎ َ إﻣﺒﺎ َر ِح‬
saara Aaarifah
Object Sarah knows him
‫ﺳﺎ َر َة ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓـَﻪ‬
iddyhwly
Object, Indirect give it to me!
‫ا ِدّﯾﻬﻮﻟﻲ‬
Subject pronoun
The subject pronoun appears before the verb or participle.
English Arabic
'ana
I
‫أﻧَﺎ‬
'ihna
we
‫إﺣﻨَﺎ‬
'inta
you(m)
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬
'inti
you(f)
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬
'intu
you(pl)
you(pl)
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬
huwwa
he/it(m)
hiya
she/it(f)
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬
humma
they
‫ﻫُـ ﱠﻢ‬
Object pronoun
You can attach an object pronoun (for example me or him) to the end of an imperative, verb or
participle. See pronouns for more information.
Ahmed envies me
aacHmad biyiHsad-ny
English Suffix
-ny
me
‫ـﻨﻲ‬
-na
us
‫ـﻨَﺎ‬
-ak
you(m)
‫ــَك‬
-ik
you(f)
‫ــِك‬
-kum
you(pl)
‫ـﻜـُﻢ‬
-uh
him/it(m)
‫ــُه‬
-ha
her/it(f)
‫ـﻬَﺎ‬
-hum
them
‫ـﻬـُﻢ‬
If there is an -i- ‫ ـِـ‬before the last consonant and the suffix starts with a vowel, the -i- ‫ ـِـ‬is dropped. If
the verb requires a preposition (to, from etc) the object goes on the preposition.
English Egyptian
warryny
show me!
‫و َرّﯾﻨﻲ‬
mahaddish saeAidna
nobody helped us
‫ﻣـَﺤَـ ّﺪ ِش ﺳﺎ َﻋـِﺪﻧَﺎ‬
'ana shuftak
I saw you(m)
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﺷـُﻔﺘـَﻚ‬
'ana bahibbik
I love you(f)
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﺑـَﺤِـﺒﱢـﻚ‬
'ana Aaarifuh
I know him
'ana 'ultilhum
I told them
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻗـُﻠﺘـِﻠﻬـُﻢ‬
Indirect object
Some verbs require two objects- for example:
give it(f) to me
iiddy-haa-ly
It is the direct object and to me is the indirect object. The indirect object suffixes are as follows:
English Suffix
-ly
to me
‫ـﻠﻲ‬
-lina
to us
‫ـﻠـِﻨَﺎ‬
-lak
to you(m)
‫ـﻠـَﻚ‬
-lik
to you(f)
‫ـﻠـِﻚ‬
-luku
to you(pl)
‫ﻚ‬
ُ ‫ـﻠُـ‬
-lu
to him/it(m)
‫ﻞ‬
ُ‫ـ‬
-laha
to her/it(f)
‫ـﻠـَﻬَﺎ‬
-luhum
to them
‫ـﻠـُﻬـُﻢ‬
Tenses
In both english and Egyptian, a verb has different tenses to indicate when something happens- in
the past, now or in the future. The usage of each tense will be explained in more details later. Here
are some examples using katab ‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺐ‬:
No of
Form Example Meaning
cases
katab
perfect he wrote 8 (i/we/you, etc)
‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺐ‬
yiktib used with modals - eg he must write
simple imperfect 8 (i/we/you, etc)
‫ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬ and kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬- he used to write
biyiktib he is writing
bi-imperfect he writes 8 (i/we/you, etc)
‫ﺑـِﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬ he knows how to write used with kaen ‫ﻛﺎ َن‬
hayiktib he will write
ha-imperfect 8 (i/we/you, etc)
‫ﻫـَﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬ used with kaen ‫ﻛﺎ َن‬
kaetab
active participle (he is) writing 3 (m/f/pl)
‫ﻛﺎ َﺗـَﺐ‬
maktub
passive participle (it is) written 3 (m/f/pl)
‫ﻣـَﻜﺘﻮب‬
iktib
imperative write! 3 (m/f/pl)
‫ا ِﻛﺘـِﺐ‬
kitaeba
verbal noun (the box is covered with) writing 2 (s/pl)
‫ﻛـِﺘﺎ َﺑـَﺔ‬
maktab
place writing place (desk or office) 2 (s/pl)
‫ﻣـَﻜﺘـَﺐ‬
Case
The two main tenses of a verb are the perfect and the simple imperfect: the bi-and ha- imperfect
just have prefixes added to the simple imperfect. The usage of these tenses will be explained in
more detail the section on time. Here is the he case of each tense:
Tense English Egyptian

huwwa katab
perfect he wrote
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻛـَﺘـَﺐ‬
huwwa laezim yiktib
simple imperfect he must write
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻻ َز ِم ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
huwwa biyiktib
bi-imperfect he writes
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺑـِﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
huwwa hayiktib
ha-imperfect he will write
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻫـَﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
There are eight possible cases for each tense, corresponding to the eight pronoun forms
(I/we/you/he, etc). Remember that the three imperfect forms are very similar.
Perfect
Perfect
Here is an example of the perfect, which is used for things that occurred in the past.
Perfect
English Pronoun Verb
'ana katabt
I wrote
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺒﺖ‬
'ihna katabna
we wrote
‫إﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺒﻨَﺎ‬
'inta katabt
you(m) wrote
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺒﺖ‬
'inti katabty
you(f) wrote
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺒﺘﻲ‬
'intu katabtu
you(pl) wrote
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺒﺘﻮا‬
huwwa katab
he/it(m) wrote
‫ﻫُـ ﱠﻮ‬ ‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺐ‬
hiya katabit
she/it(f) wrote
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺒـِﺖ‬
humma katabu
they wrote
they wrote
‫ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺒﻮا‬
Simple imperfect
The imperfect has no meaning on its own: it is used in four ways:
with kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬for things that happened in the past

with modals like must, could, should etc.
with bi-prefix for things happening now
with ha-prefix for things that will happen
Here is an example with laazim, which means must.
Simple Imperfect
English Pronoun modal Verb
'ana laezim 'aktib
I must write
‫ﻻ َز ِم أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫أﻛﺘـِﺐ‬
'ihna laezim niktib
we must write
‫ﻻ َز ِم إﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻧـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
'inta laezim tiktib
you(m) must write
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫ﻻ َز ِم إﻧ‬ ‫ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
'inti laezim tiktiby
you(f) must write
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻲ ﻻ َز ِم إﻧ‬
'intu laezim tiktibu
you(pl)must write
‫ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻮا ﻻ َز ِم إﻧﺘﻮا‬
huwwa laezim yiktib
he/it(m)must write
‫ﻻ َز ِم ﻫُـ ﱠﻮ‬ ‫ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
hiya laezim tiktib
she/it(f)must write
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻻ َز ِم ﻫِـ‬ ‫ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
humma laezim yiktibu
they must write
‫ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻮا ﻻ َز ِم ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬
The english word must is a proper modal, it is the same for all cases. The Egyptian word
laezim ‫ ﻻ َز ِم‬is a proper modal. Later on, you will learn how to use participles and verbs as modals,
and you will see how they will change to match the case.
bi-imperfect
For the majority of verbs, the bi-imperfect is used to describe things happening now, and for
habitual actions. See active participles for the exceptions
It is the same as the simple imperfect, with a bi- ‫ ﺑِـ‬in front. Note that there are some small changes
to the beginning of the imperfect when the prefix is added.
bi-imperfect
English Pronoun verb
'ana baktib
I write
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﺑـَﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
'ihna biniktib
we write
‫إﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﺑـِﻨـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
'inta bitiktib
you(m) write
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
'inti bitiktiby
you(f) write
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻲ‬
'intu bitiktibu
you(pl) write
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻮا‬
huwwa biyiktib
he/it(m) writes
‫ﻫُـ ﱠﻮ‬ ‫ﺑـِﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
hiya bitiktib
she/it(f) writes
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
humma biyiktibu
they write
‫ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﺑـِﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻮا‬
ha-imperfect
The ha-imperfect is used for things that will happen at some time in the future.
It is the same as the simple imperfect, with ha- ‫ ﻫَـ‬in front. Note that there are some small changes to
the beginning of the imperfect when the prefix is added.
ha-imperfect
'ana haktib
I will write
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﻫـَﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
'ihna haniktib
we will write
‫إﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻫـَﻨـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
'inta hatiktib
you(m) will write
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
'inti hatiktiby
you(f) will write
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻲ‬
'intu hatiktibu
you(pl) will write
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻮا‬
huwwa hayiktib
he/it(m) will write
‫ﻫُـ ﱠﻮ‬ ‫ﻫـَﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
hiya hatiktib
she/it(f) will write
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
humma hayiktibu
humma hayiktibu
they will write
‫ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻫـَﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻮا‬
is/was/will be
As mentioned earlier, there is no word for is in Egyptian. There are, however, words for was - kaen
‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬and will be - haykun ‫ﻫـَﯿﻜﻮن‬.
kaan
kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬can be used on its own to talk about some situation in the past, or it can be used with the
imperfect and bi-imperfect to move the meaning of the verb into the past, and with the ha-imperfect
to indicate something that almost or nearly happened.
kaan
ana kunt
I was
‫ا َﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻨﺖ‬
ihna kunna
we were
‫ا ِﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻛُـﻨﱠﺎ‬
'inta kunt
you(m) were
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻨﺖ‬
'inti kunty
you(f) were
you(f) were
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻨﺘﻲ‬
'intu kuntu
you(pl) were
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﻛـُﻨﺘﻮا‬
huwa kaen
he/it(m) was
‫ﻫُـ َﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎ َن‬
hiya kaenit
she/it(f) was
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻛﺎ َﻧـِﺖ ﻫِـ‬
humma kanu
they were
‫ﻛﺎ َﻧﻮا ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬
English Egyptian
kaen hina
he was here
‫ﻛﺎ َن ﻫـِﻨَﺎ‬
kunt taAbaen 'awy
I was too tired
‫ﻛـُﻨﺖ ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َن ﻗـَﻮي‬
ilhafla kaenit kuwayisa
the party was good ‫ا ِﻟﺤـَﻔﻠـَﺔ ﻛﺎ َﻧـِﺖ ﻛـُﻮ‬
‫َيـِسـَة‬
kaen fy mayaeh wa chilsit
preposition there was water, but it's finished
‫ﻛﺎ َن ﻓﻲ ﻣـَﯿﺎ َه و َ ﺧـِﻠﺼـِﺖ‬
kaen Aandina biyt
preposition we had a house
‫ﻛﺎ َن ﻋـَﻨﺪ ِﻧﺎ َ ﺑـِﯿﺖ‬
kaen biyishrab sygaara
bi-imperfect he was smoking a cigarette
‫ﻛﺎ َن ﺑـِﯿـِﺸﺮ َب ﺳﯿﺠﺎ َر َة‬
kaen biyishrab sigaeyar
bi-imperfect he used to smoke cigarettes
‫ﻛﺎ َن ﺑـِﯿـِﺸﺮ َب ﺳـِﺠﺎ َﯾـَﺮ‬
kunt hadusuh
ha-imperfect I almost ran him over
‫ﻛـُﻨﺖ ﻫـَﺪوﺳـُﻪ‬
Note that, for prepositional sentences, kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬does not change with the subject of the sentence -
it is always kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬- it was.
haykwn
haykun ‫ ﻫـَﯿﻜﻮن‬simply means will be. Here are some examples:
haykwn
English Pronoun verb
ana hakun
I will be
‫ا َﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﻫـَﻜﻮن‬
ihna hankun
we will be
‫ا ِﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻫـَﻨﻜﻮن‬
'inta hatkun
you(m) will be
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘﻜﻮن‬
'inti hatkuny
you(f) will be
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
'intu hatkunu
you(pl) will be
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘﻜﻮﻧﻮا‬
huwa haykun
he/it(m) will be
‫ﻫُـ َﻮ‬ ‫ﻫـَﯿﻜﻮن‬
hiya hatkun
she/it will be(f)
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘﻜﻮن‬
humma haykunu
they will be
‫ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻫـَﯿﻜﻮﻧﻮا‬
English Egyptian
ilhafla hatkun kuwayisa
the party will be good
‫ا ِﻟﺤـَﻔﻠـَﺔ ﻫـَﺘﻜﻮن ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺴـَﺔ‬
haykun fy hawaa' kityr bukra
there will be a lot of wind tomorrow
‫ﻫـَﯿﻜﻮن ﻓﻲ ﻫـَﻮا َء ﻛـِﺘﯿﺮ ﺑـُﻜﺮ َة‬
'ana hakun faady issaeAa chamsa
I will be free at five
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻫـَﻜﻮن ﻓﺎ َﺿﻲ ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َﻋـَﺔ ﺧـَﻤﺴـَﺔ‬
Note that, for prepositional sentences, haykun ‫ ﻫـَﯿﻜﻮن‬does not change with the subject of the
sentence - it is always haykun ‫ ﻫـَﯿﻜﻮن‬- it will be.
Time
Here is a summary of ways to express when something happens:
Construction Example Meaning

katab
perfect he wrote
‫ﻛـَﺘـَﺐ‬
kaen yiktib
kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬+ imperfect
‫ ﻛﺎ َن ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬he was writing
kaen biyiktib he used to write
kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬+ bi-imperfect
‫ﻛﺎ َن ﺑـِﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
biyiktib he is writing
bi-imperfect he writes
‫ﺑـِﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬ he can write
hayiktib
ha-imperfect he will write
‫ﻫـَﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
kaen hayiktib
he intended to write
‫ﻛﺎ َن ﻫـَﯿـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬+ ha-imperfect
kaen haymut
he almost died
‫ﻛﺎ َن ﻫـَﯿﻤﻮت‬
raayih yiktib
raayih ‫ را َﯾـِﺢ‬+ imperfect
‫را َﯾـِﺢ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
he is going to write
hayruh yiktib
hayruh ‫ ﺣـَﯿﺮوح‬+ imperfect
‫ﻫـَﯿﺮوح ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
Participles
In both English and Egyptian, a participle is derived from a verb, but is used like an adjective. There
are two types of participle- active and passive. As they are adjectives, in Egyptian, there are three
forms- masculine, feminine and plural.
Participle English Masculine Feminine Plural

-a -yn
‫ــَة‬ ‫ـﯿﻦ‬
Aaeyiz Aaeyiza Aaeyizyn
Active wanting
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ َة‬ ‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰﯾﻦ‬
Aaarif Aaarifa Aaarifyn
Active knowing
‫ﻋﺎ َر ِف‬ ‫ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓﯿﻦ‬
faehim faehima faehimyn
Active understanding
‫ﻓﺎ َﻫـِﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ َﻫـِﻤـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ َﻫـِﻤﯿﻦ‬
Galayaen Galayaen Galayaen
Active boiling
‫ﻏـَﻠـَﯿﺎ َن‬ ‫ﻏـَﻠـَﯿﺎ َن‬ ‫ﻏـَﻠـَﯿﺎ َن‬
sarhaen sarhaena sarhanyn
Active daydreaming
‫ﺳـَﺮﺣﺎ َن‬ ‫ﺳـَﺮﺣﺎ َﻧـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺳـَﺮﺣﺎ َﻧﯿﻦ‬
mitgalid mitgalida mitgalidyn
Passive bound
‫ﻣـِﺘﺠـَﻠـِﺪ‬ ‫ﻣـِﺘﺠـَﻠـِﺪ َة‬ ‫ﻣـِﺘﺠـَﻠـِﺪﯾﻦ‬
mubaarak mubaaraka mubaarakyn
Passive blessed
‫ﻣـُﺒﺎ َر َك‬ ‫ﻣـُﺒﺎ َر َﻛـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻣـُﺒﺎ َر َﻛﯿﻦ‬
mawlud mawluda mawludyn
Passive born
‫ﻣـَﻮﻟﻮد‬ ‫ﻣـَﻮﻟﻮد َة‬ ‫ﻣـَﻮﻟﻮدﯾﻦ‬
mafhum mafhuma mafhumyn
Passive understood
‫ﻣـَﻔﻬﻮم‬ ‫ﻣـَﻔﻬﻮﻣـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻣـَﻔﻬﻮﻣﯿﻦ‬
Active Participles
In English, we can describe something happening now by using the present tense or the active
participle:
present I look a single event or habitual action
present I am looking a continuous action
In Egyptian, for some verbs, the active participle is the normal way of expressing what somebody is
doing right now. For other verbs, the bi-imperfect is used. Generally, participles are used for verbs
that relate to a state or continuous actions, but there is no flexibility: you have to use a participle for
a particular verb whether the action is continuous or not. The four groups of verbs where the
participle is used are:
movement: going, coming etc

senses: seeing, hearing
states of mind: knowing, understanding, angry
states of body: sleeping
Active
English Verb
Participle
hatt haatyt
put
‫ﻂ‬
ّ ‫ﺣﺎ َﻃﯿﺖ ﺣَـ‬
saefir misaefir
travel
‫ﺳﺎ َﻓـِﺮ‬ ‫ﻣـِﺴﺎ َﻓـِﺮ‬
Airif Aaarif
know
‫ﻋـِﺮ ِف‬ ‫ﻋﺎ َر ِف‬
fihim faehim
understand
‫ﻓـِﻬـِﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ َﻫـِﻢ‬
naem naeyim
sleep
‫ﻧﺎ َم‬ ‫ﻧﺎ َﯾـِﻢ‬
ziAil zaAlaen
angry
‫ز ِﻋـِﻞ‬ ‫ز َﻋﻼ َن‬
Active participles are like adjectives, and have masculine, feminine and plural forms. Here are some
examples showing how the participle agrees with the subject
English Verb
'ana Aaarif 'ahmad
I(m) know Ahmed
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِف أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
'ana Aaarifa 'ahmad
I(f) know Ahmed
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓـَﺔ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
ihna Aaarifyn 'ahmad
we know Ahmed
‫ا ِﺣﻨﺎ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓﯿﻦ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
'inta Aaarif 'ahmad
you(m) know Ahmed
‫إﻧﺖ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِف أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
'inti Aaarifa 'ahmad
you(f) know Ahmed
‫إﻧﺖ ِ ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓـَﺔ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
'intu Aaarifyn 'ahmad
you(pl) know Ahmed
‫إﻧﺘﻮ ا ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓﯿﻦ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
huwwa Aaarif 'ahmad
he knows Ahmed
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِف أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
hiya Aaarifa 'ahmad
she knows Ahmed
‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓـَﺔ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
humma Aaarifyn 'ahmad
they know Ahmed
‫ﻫُـﻤّﺎ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓﯿﻦ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
The participle is also used for an action that took place in the past but whose effect is still in force,
for example reserving a room:
Element English Arabic

tabacht ilAasha
perfect I cooked dinner (a long time ago)
‫ﻃـَﺒـَﺨﺖ ا ِﻟﻌـَﺸَﺎ‬
'ana taabach Aasha
participle I cooked dinner (it is reaady now)
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻃﺎ َﺑـَﺦ ﻋـَﺸَﺎ‬
Passive Participles
A passive participle describes something that has had something done to it. In English it often ends
with -ed, and in Egyptian, it often begins with ma- ‫ﻣَـ‬. Passive participles are like adjectives, and
have masculine, feminine and plural forms.
English Arabic Verb

il'akl matbuch tabach
the food is cooked
‫ا ِﻷﻛﻞ ﻣـَﻄﺒﻮخ‬ ‫ﻃـَﺒـَﺦ‬
issultaniya maksura kasar
the bowl is broken
‫ا ِﻟﺴـُﻠﻄـَﻨـِﯿـَﺔ ﻣـَﻜﺴﻮر َة‬ ‫ﻛـَﺴـَﺮ‬
il'ardiyaet maGsulyn Gasal
the floors are washed
‫ا ِﻷرﺿـِﯿﺎ َت ﻣـَﻐﺴﻮﻟﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻏـَﺴـَﻞ‬
kunt mitgawwiz 'itgawwiz
I was married
‫ﻛـُﻨﺖ ﻣـِﺘﺠَـ ّﻮ ِز‬ ‫إﺗﺠَـ ّﻮ ِز‬
salamy mudachan dachchan
smoked salami
‫ﺳـَﻼ َﻣﻲ ﻣـُﺪ َﺧـَﻦ‬ ‫د َﺧﱠـﻦ‬
modals: possibility, preference etc
You can use a modal together with the simple imperfect to indicate whether something must, may,
could happen. Most proper modals are invariable- there is no I/you/he form. Here are some
examples:
Modal Example Meaning

laezim laezim yiktib
laezim laezim yiktib
he must write
‫ﻻ َز ِم‬ ‫ﻻ َز ِم ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
mumkin mumkin yiktib
he could write
‫ﻣـُﻤﻜـِﻦ‬ ‫ﻣـُﻤﻜـِﻦ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
mihtaeg mihtaeg yiktib
he needs to write
‫ﻣـِﺤﺘﺎ َج‬ ‫ﻣـِﺤﺘﺎ َج ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
yimkin yimkin yiktib
he might write
‫ﯾـِﻤﻜـِﻦ‬ ‫ﯾـِﻤﻜـِﻦ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
ilmafrud ilmafrud yiktib
he should> write
‫ا ِﻟﻤـَﻔﺮوض‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻤـَﻔﺮوض ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
darury darury yiktib
it is essential that he should write
‫ﺿـَﺮوري‬ ‫ﺿـَﺮوري ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
Aalashaen
‫ ﻋـَﻠـَﺸﺎ َن‬Aalashaen yiktib
in order to write
pronounced Aashaen
‫ِﺐ‬
‫ـ‬ ‫ِﻜﺘ‬
‫ـ‬ ‫ﯾ‬ ‫َن‬ ‫َﺸﺎ‬
‫ـ‬ ‫َﻠ‬
‫ـ‬ ‫ﻋ‬
‫ﻋـَﺸﺎ َن‬
There are also some verbs or participles that can be used as modals. Here are some examples:
Type Modal Example Meaning

Aaewiz Aaewiz yiktib
Aaewiz Aaewiz yiktib
participle he wants to write
‫ﻋﺎ َو ِز‬ ‫ﻋﺎ َو ِز ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
naewy naewy yiktib
participle he intends to write
‫ﻧﺎ َوي‬ ‫ﻧﺎ َوي ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
nifs nifsuh yiktib
noun he wishes he could write
‫ﻧـِﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻧـِﻔﺴـُﻪ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
'idir, yi'dar yi'dar yiktib
verb he is able to write
‫ ﯾـِﻘﺪ َر‬،‫ﻗـِﺪ ِر‬ ‫ﯾـِﻘﺪ َر ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
Airif, yiAraf yiAraf yiktib
verb he knows how to write
‫ ﯾـِﻌﺮ َف‬،‫ﯾـِﻌﺮ َف ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ ﻋـِﺮ ِف‬
habb, yihibb yihibb yiktib
verb he likes to write
‫ﺐ‬
ّ ‫ ﯾـِﺤِـ‬،ّ‫ﺣَـﺐ‬ ‫ﺐ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
ّ ‫ﯾـِﺤِـ‬
lihi', yihla' lihi' yiktib
verb he managed to write
‫ ﯾـِﺤﻠـَﻖ‬،‫ﻟـِﺤـِﻖ‬ ‫ﻟـِﺤـِﻖ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
raah, yiruh raah yiktib
verb he went to write
‫ ﯾـِﺮوح‬،‫را َح‬ ‫را َح ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
nisy, yinsa nisi yiktib
verb he forgot to write
‫ ﯾـِﻨﺴﻰ‬،‫ﻧـِﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻧـِﺲ ِ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
Participles must agree with the gender and number, and verbs must be the appropriate case. True
modals like laezim ‫ ﻻ َز ِم‬do not change. Here are some examples.
Type English Arabic
'ana laezim 'aktib
modal I must write
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻻ َز ِم أﻛﺘـِﺐ‬
'inta laezim tiktib
modal you(m) must write
‫إﻧﺖ َ ﻻ َز ِم ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
huwwa laezim yiktib
modal he must write
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻻ َز ِم ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
humma laezim tiktibu
modal they must write
‫ﻫُـ ّﻢ َ ﻻ َز ِم ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻮا‬
'ana Aaeyiz 'aktib
participle I want to write
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ أﻛﺘـِﺐ‬
hiya Aaeyiza tiktib
participle she wants to write
‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ َة ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
humma Aaeyizyn yiktibu
participle they want to write
‫ﻫُـ ّﻢ َ ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰﯾﻦ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻮا‬
ana baehibb 'aktib
verb I like to write
‫ﺐ أﻛﺘـِﺐ‬
ّ ‫ا َﻧﺎ َ ﺑﺎ َﺣِـ‬
huwwa biyihibb yiktib
verb he likes to write
‫ﺐ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
ّ ‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺑـِﯿـِﺤِـ‬
hiya bitihibb tiktib
verb she likes to write
‫ﺐ ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
ّ ‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﺑـِﺘـِﺤِـ‬
humma biyihibbu yiktibu
verb they like to write
‫ﻫُـ ّﻢ َ ﺑـِﯿـِﺤِـﺒّﻮ ا ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺒﻮا‬
If the subject of the verb is not the same as the subject of the modal
I want to go (same)
I want him to go (different)
in both english and egpytian you add an object pronoun to the modal: in Egyptian it is attached to
the modal, or to any preposition associated with it.
English Arabic
hiya Aaeyizany 'aktib
she wants me to write
‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ َﻧﻲ أﻛﺘـِﺐ‬
hiya Aaeyiza tiktib
she wants to write
‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ َة ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
hiya Aaeyizah yiktib
she wants him to write
‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ َه ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
huwwa Aaeyizha tiktib
he wants her to write
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰﻫﺎ َ ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
bitihibbuh yiktib
she likes him to write
‫ﺑـِﺘـِﺤِـﺒﱡـﻪ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
biyihibbha tiktib
he likes her to write
‫ﺑـِﯿـِﺤِـﺒّﻬﺎ َ ﺗـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
chalitw yiktib
I let him write
‫ﺧـَﻠـِﺘﻮ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
talabt minnuh yiktib
I asked him to write
‫ﻃـَﻠـَﺒﺖ ﻣِـﻨﱡـﻪ ﯾـِﻜﺘـِﺐ‬
Imperatives
When you want to tell somebody to do something, you use an imperative. In Egyptian, there are
three forms- masculine, feminine and plural. Here are some examples.
English Verb Masculine Feminine Plural

-y -u
Imperfect
‫ـﻲ‬ ‫ـﻮا‬
yibuss buss bussy bussu
look!
‫ﺺ‬
ّ ‫ﯾـِﺒُـ‬ ‫ﺺ‬
ّ ‫ﺑُـ‬ ‫ﺑُـﺼّﻲ‬ ‫ﺑُـﺼّﻮا‬
yiruh ruwh ruwhy ruwhu
go!
‫ﯾـِﺮوح‬ ‫ر ُوح‬ ‫ر ُوﺣﻮا ر ُوﺣﻲ‬
yiygy
come!
‫ ﯾـِﯿﺠﻲ‬taAaela taAaly taAalu
‫ل‬
َ َ ‫ﺗـَﻌﺎ َﻟﻮا ﺗـَﻌﺎ َﻟﻲ ﺗـَﻌﺎ‬
irregular
yaekul kul kuly kulu
eat!
‫ﯾﺎ َﻛـُﻞ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻞ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻠﻮا‬
yuskut 'iskut 'iskuty 'iskutu
shut up!
‫ﯾـُﺴﻜـُﺖ‬ ‫إﺳﻜـُﺖ‬ ‫إﺳﻜـُﺘﻮا إﺳﻜـُﺘﻲ‬
yihda 'ihda 'ihdy 'ihdu
calm down!
‫ﯾـِﻬﺪى‬ ‫إﻫﺪى‬ ‫إﻫﺪي‬ ‫إﻫﺪوا‬
walk! yimshy 'imshy 'imshy 'imshu
(go away) ‫ﯾـِﻤﺸﻲ‬ ‫إﻣﺸﻲ‬ ‫إﻣﺸﻲ‬ ‫إﻣﺸﻮا‬
verbal nouns
It is sometimes useful to make a noun from a verb. Here are some examples:
English Arabic Verb

iGsil iydyk 'abl il'akl kal
wash your hands before eating
‫ا ِﻏﺴـِﻞ ا ِﯾﺪﯾﻚ ﻗـَﺒﻞ ا ِﻷﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻛـَﻞ‬
Aandy hagz haegiz
I have a reservation
‫ﺣﺎ َﺟـِﺰ ﻋـَﻨﺪي ﺣـَﺠﺰ‬
illiaAba dih li'arbAa laAyba
liAib
This game is for four players ‫ا ِﻟﱢــَﻌﺒـَﺔ د ِه ﻟـِﺄرﺑﻊ َ ﻻ‬
‫ﻟـِﻌـِﺐ‬
‫َعيبَا‬
Negation of verbs
You can say that something is not happening using the word mish ‫ﻣـِﺶ‬. It can appear before a verb,
or wrapped around it. Here are some examples:
English Egyptian
huwwa mish hina
he is not here
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻣـِﺶ ﻫـِﻨَﺎ‬
huwwa makansh hina
he was not here
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻣـَﻜﺎ َﻧﺶ ﻫـِﻨَﺎ‬
masafirtish barra masr
I have not travelled outside egypt
‫ﻣـَﺴـَﻔـِﺮﺗـِﺶ ﺑَـﺮّا َ ﻣـَﺼﺮ‬
'ana mish Aaarif
I do not know
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻣـِﺶ ﻋﺎ َر ِف‬
ma'dirsh yigy
he was not able to come
‫ﻣـَﻘﺪ ِرش ﯾـِﺠﻲ‬
mish hayigy
he will not come
he will not come
‫ﻣـِﺶ ﻫـَﯿـِﺠﻲ‬
matimshysh
don't go!
‫ﻣـَﺘـِﻤﺸﯿﺶ‬
See Negation for more details.
Adverbs
A verb explains what is being done: adverbs can be used to specify how, when, where and in what
manner it is being done. There can be more than one adverb- they are placed after the verb. Here
are some examples.
English Egyptian
'ahmad taalaA fu'
direction Ahmed is going up (stairs)
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﻃﺎ َﻟـَﻊ ﻓﻮق‬
'ahmad gayy hina
position Ahmed is coming here
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺟـَﯿﻲ ﻫـِﻨَﺎ‬
'ahmad hayigy bukra biillyl
time Ahmed will come tomorrow evening
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺣـَﯿـِﺠﻲ ﺑـُﻜﺮ َة ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟّﯿﻞ‬
'ahmad biyimshy daymaen
frequency Ahmed always walks
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺑـِﯿـِﻤﺸﻲ د َﯾﻤًﺎ‬
'ahmad biyimshy bisuraAa
PRO quality
version Are you aAhmed
developer? Trywalks quickly
out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com
quality Ahmed walks quickly
‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺑـِﯿـِﻤﺸﻲ ﺑـِﺴـُﺮ َﻋـَﺔ‬
'ahmad biyimshy bisuraAa giddaen
extent Ahmed walks extremely quickly
‫ا‬‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺑـِﯿـِﻤﺸﻲ ﺑـِﺴـُﺮ َﻋـَﺔ ﺟِـﺪ‬
'ahmad biyitaalaA issalaelim daymaen
Ahmed always walks slowly upstairs in bishwysh fy illyl
the evening ‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺑـِﯿـِﻄﺎ َﻟـَﻊ ا ِﻟﺴـَﻼ َﻟـِﻢ د َﯾﻤًﺎ ﺑـِﺸﻮﯾﺶ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ا ِﻟّﯿﻞ‬
direction
Direction adverbs can be used with verbs like go
English Egyptian English example Egyptian example

fu' 'ana taalaA fu'
up I am going upstairs
‫ﻓﻮق‬ ‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻃﺎ َﻟـَﻊ ﻓﻮق‬
taht Gitis taht
down he dived down
‫ﺗـَﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﻏـِﻄـِﺲ ﺗـَﺤﺖ‬
shamael chushsh shamael
left turn left!
‫ﺷـَﻤﺎ َل‬ ‫ﺶ ﺷـَﻤﺎ َل‬
ّ ‫ﺧُـ‬
yimyn buss yimyn
right look right!
‫ﯾـِﻤﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺺ ﯾـِﻤﯿﻦ‬
ّ ‫ﺑُـ‬
Aala tul
'imshy Aala tul
straight ahead ‫ ﻋـَﻠﻰ‬go(walk) straight ahead
‫إﻣﺸﻲ ﻋـَﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل‬
‫ﻃﻮل‬
location
Location adverbs can be used with verbs like go

hina taAala hina
here come here!
‫ﻫـِﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﺗـَﻌﺎ َﻟﻰ ﻫـِﻨَﺎ‬
hinaek laezim 'aruwh hinaek bukrah
there I have to go there tomorrow
‫ﻫـِﻨﺎ َك‬ ‫ﻻ َز ِم أر ُوح ﻫـِﻨﺎ َك ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه‬
time
Time adverbs are used to specify when you do something: they can be used with almost any verb.

halaen haftahuh halaen
immediately I will open it immediately
‫ﻻ‬
ً َ ‫ﺣﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ‬
ً َ ‫ﻫـَﻔﺘـَﺤـُﻪ ﺣﺎ‬
dilwa'ty 'ihna gaehizyn dilwa'ty
dilwa'ty 'ihna gaehizyn dilwa'ty
now we are ready now
‫د ِﻟﻮ َﻗﺘﻲ‬ ‫إﺣﻨﺎ َ ﺟﺎ َﻫـِﺰﯾﻦ د ِﻟﻮ َﻗﺘﻲ‬
no
already he (is) already here huwwa mawgwd
equivalent
ilhafla innahaarda biillyl
innahaarda
today the party is this evening ‫ا ِﻟﺤـَﻔﻠـَﺔ ا ِﻟﻨـَﻬﺎ َرد َة ﺑـِﺎ‬
‫ا ِﻟﻨـَﻬﺎ َرد َة‬
‫ِلّيل‬
haruwh il'iskandiraaya
bukrah bukrah
tomorrow I will go to Alexandria tomorrow
‫ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه‬ ‫ﻫـَﺮ ُوح ا ِﻹﺳﻜـَﻨﺪ ِرا َﯾـَﺔ‬
‫ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه‬
the day after baAd bukrah I will come back the day after 'ana hargaA baAd bukrah
tomorrow ‫ ﺑـَﻌﺪ ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه‬tomorrow ‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻫـَﺮﺟـَﻊ ﺑـَﻌﺪ ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه‬
'imbaarih wasalt 'imbaarih
yesterday she arrived yesterday
‫إﻣﺒﺎ َر ِح‬ ‫و َﺻـَﻠﺖ إﻣﺒﺎ َر ِح‬
'awil
day before 'ashtarytuh 'awil 'imbaarih
'imbaarih I bought it the day before yesterday
yesterday ‫أﺷﺘـَﺮﯾﺘـُﻪ أو ِل إﻣﺒﺎ َر ِح‬
‫أو ِل إﻣﺒﺎ َر ِح‬
il'usbwaA hanrawwah il'usbwaA
illigaey illigaey
next week
‫ ا ِﻷ ُﺳﺒﻮ َع‬we will go home next week ‫ﻫـَﻨﺮ َ ّو َح ا ِﻷ ُﺳﺒﻮ َع ا ِﻟﱢـﺠﺎ‬
‫ا ِﻟﱢـﺠﺎ َي‬ ‫َي‬
ihna fy 'agaeza il'usbwaA
il'usbwaA dih
dih
this week ‫ ا ِﻷ ُﺳﺒﻮ َع‬we are on holiday this week ‫ا ِﺣﻨﺎ َ ﻓﻲ أﺟﺎ َز َة ا ِﻷ ُﺳﺒﻮ‬
‫د ِه‬
‫َع د ِه‬
il'usbwaA 'illy
faet shuftaha il'usbwaA 'illy
last week faet
‫ ا ِﻷ ُﺳﺒﻮ َع‬I saw her last week
‫ﺷـُﻔﺘـَﻬﺎ َ ا ِﻷ ُﺳﺒﻮ َع إﻟّﻲ ﻓﺎ َت‬
‫إﻟّﻲ ﻓﺎ َت‬
badry laezim ni'um badry bukrah
early we must get up early tomorrow
‫ﺑـَﺪري‬ ‫ﻻ َز ِم ﻧـِﻘﻮم ﺑـَﺪري ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه‬
biillyl fy hafla biillyl
evening there is a party this evening
‫ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟّﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣـَﻔﻠـَﺔ ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟّﯿﻞ‬
baAdyn hashufak baAdyn
later see you later
‫ﺑـَﻌﺪﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﺣـَﺸﻮﻓـَﻚ ﺑـَﻌﺪﯾﻦ‬
Ganny il'aGniya dih
kamaen kamaen marrah
again marrah play that song again
‫ﻏَـﻨّﻲ ا ِﻷﻏﻨـِﯿـَﺔ د ِه ﻛـَﻤﺎ َن‬
‫ﻛـَﻤﺎ َن ﻣَـ ّﺮ َه‬
‫ﻣَـ ّﺮ َه‬
hanaekul wa baAd kida
baAd kida we will eat and afterwards we will hani'Aad fyilginyna
afterwards
baAd kida we will eat and afterwards we will
afterwards
‫ﺑـَﻌﺪ ﻛـِﺪ َة‬ sit in the garden ‫ﻫـَﻨﺎ َﻛـُﻞ و َ ﺑـَﻌﺪ ﻛـِﺪ َة ﻫـَﻨـِﻘﻌـَﺪ‬
‫ﻓﯿﺎ ِﻟﺠـِﻨﯿﻨـَﺔ‬
min I have lived here for a long time (lit. sikint hina min zamaen
ago
‫ﻣـِﻦ‬ since a long time ago ‫ﺳـِﻜـِﻨﺖ ﻫـِﻨﺎ َ ﻣـِﻦ ز َﻣﺎ َن‬
frequency
This group of adverbs specifies how frequently you do something. Here are some examples:

baechud Aadataen taAsylla baAd
Aaedataen
usually I usually take a nap after lunch ilGadaa'
‫ﻋﺎ َد َﺗًﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ َﺧـُﺪ ﻋـَﺪ َﺗًﺎ ﺗـَﻌﺴﯿﻠﱠـﺔ ﺑـَﻌﺪ ا ِﻟﻐـَﺪا َء‬
daymaen maktabuh mitsattif daymaen
always his office is always neat
‫د َﯾﻤًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣـَﻜﺘـَﺒـُﻪ ﻣـِﺘﺴَـﺘﱢـﻒ د َﯾﻤًﺎ‬
naediraan 'ana bashuf ahmad naediraan
rarely I rarely see Ahmed
‫ﻧﺎ َد ِرًا‬ ‫أﻧﺎ َ ﺑﺎ َﺷﻮف ا َﺣﻤـَﺪ ﻧﺎ َد ِرًا‬
bi'intizaem baruh ilgym bi'intizaem
regularly I go to the gym regularly
‫ﺑـِﺈﻧﺘـِﻈﺎ َم‬ ‫ﺑـَﺮوح ا ِﻟﺠﯿﻢ ﺑـِﺈﻧﺘـِﻈﺎ َم‬
hadd s'aalny Aanuh dih min
min 'urayib somebody asked me about that 'urayib
recently
‫ﻣـِﻦ ﻗـُﺮ َﯾـِﺐ‬ recently
recently
‫ ﻣـِﻦ ﻗـُﺮ َﯾـِﺐ‬recently ‫ﺣَـ ّﺪ ﺳﺄ َﻟﻨﻲ ﻋـَﻨـُﻪ د ِه ﻣـِﻦ ﻗـُﺮ َﯾـِﺐ‬
'abadaen mish Aaarifuh 'abadaen
at all I don't know him at all
‫أﺑـَﺪًا‬ ‫ﻣـِﺶ ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓـُﻪ أﺑـَﺪًا‬
thany Aaeyiz 'aruh hinaek thany
again I would like to go there again
‫ﺛﺎ َﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ أروح ﻫـِﻨﺎ َك ﺛﺎ َﻧﻲ‬
Galibaen hiya taAbaena Galibaen
often she is often tired
‫ﻏـَﻠـِﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َﻧـَﺔ ﻏـَﻠـِﺒًﺎ‬
lil'abad mahaddish biyiAish lil'abad
forever nobody lives for ever
‫ﻟـِﻸﺑـَﺪ‬ ‫ﻣـَﺤَـ ّﺪ ِش ﺑـِﯿـِﻌـِﺶ ﻟـِﻸﺑـَﺪ‬
tul ilyum mattar tul ilyum
all day it rained all day
‫ﻃﻮل ا ِﻟﯿﻮم‬ ‫ﻣَـﻄﱠـﺮ ﻃﻮل ا ِﻟﯿﻮم‬
all kaen biyishrib sagaeyar tul
tul ilAumr he smoked cigarettes all his
(my/his/her) Aumruh
‫ﻃﻮل ا ِﻟﻌـُﻤﺮ‬ life
life ‫ﻛﺎ َن ﺑـِﯿـِﺸﺮ ِب ﺳـَﺠﺎ َﯾـَﺮ ﻃﻮل ﻋـُﻤﺮ ُه‬
'awilaen
firstly
‫ﻻ‬
ً ِ ‫أو‬
'achyraan zaar lundun 'achyraan
finally he finally visited london
‫أﺧﯿﺮًا‬ ‫زا َر ﻟـُﻨﺪ ُن أﺧﯿﺮًا‬
min wa't
baruh ilginyna min wa't lilthany
lilthany
lilthany
occasionally ‫ﺑـَﺮوح ا ِﻟﺠـِﻨﯿﻨـَﺔ ﻣـِﻦ و َﻗﺖ ﻟـِﻠﺜﺎ‬
‫ ﻣـِﻦ و َﻗﺖ‬I go to the park occasionally
‫َني‬
‫ﻟـِﻠﺜﺎ َﻧﻲ‬
biissaeAa laezim titammim biissaeAa
hourly you must check hourly
‫ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﺴﺎ َﻋـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ َز ِم ﺗـِﺘَـﻤﱢـﻢ ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﺴﺎ َﻋـَﺔ‬
binishuf samak 'irsh 'ahyanaen
'ahyanaen we sometimes see sharks
sometimes hina
‫أﺣﯿﺎ َﻧًﺎ‬ here
‫ﺑـِﻨـِﺸﻮف ﺳـَﻤـَﻚ ﻗـِﺮش أﺣﯿﺎ َﻧًﺎ ﻫـِﻨَﺎ‬
'aw'aet bitmattar fy masr
'aw'aet ‫أوﻗﺎ َت ﺑـِﺘﻤَـﻄﱠـﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣـَﺼﺮ‬
sometimes
‫ أوﻗﺎ َت‬it sometimes rains in Egypt
Note: always goes at beginning of
sentence
Extent
The following adverbs can be placed after an adjective or another adverb to indicate the extent:
English Egyptian
shwaya
slightly
‫ﺷﻮ َﯾـَﺔ‬
maA'ula
reasonably
‫ﻣـَﻌﻘﻮﻟـَﺔ‬
'awy
very
‫ﻗـَﻮي‬
chaalis
extremely
giddaen
‫ا‬‫ﺟِـﺪ‬
Aail'achir
‫ﻋـَﺎ ِﻷﺧـِﺮ‬
'awy
too
‫ﻗـَﻮي‬
Derived adverbs
Most adjectives in english can be converted to an adverb by adding the letters -ly, for example nice
becomes nicely. In Egyptian, the adjective can be converted to an adverb by adding the ending -an
‫ـًﺎ‬
English adjective adverb

rasmy rasmyaen
officially
‫ر َﺳﻤﻲ‬ ‫ر َﺳﻤﯿًﺎ‬
nazary nazariyaen
theoretically
theoretically
‫ﻧـَﻈـَﺮي‬ ‫ﻧـَﻈـَﺮ ِﯾًﺎ‬
tabyAy tabyAyaen
naturally
‫ﻃـَﺒﯿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻃـَﺒﯿﻌﯿًﺎ‬
harfy harfyaen
literally
‫ﺣـَﺮﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣـَﺮﻓﯿًﺎ‬
Aumumy Aumumaen
generally
‫ﻋـُﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻋـُﻤﻮﻣًﺎ‬
Aady Aadataen
normally
‫ﻋﺎ َدي‬ ‫ﻋـَﺪ َﺗًﺎ‬
'ulayil 'alayalaen
slightly
‫ﻗـُﻠـَﯿـِﻞ‬ ‫ﻼ‬
ً ‫ﻗـَﻠـَﯿَـ‬
Similarly, a noun can be converted to an adverbal phrase by adding the word with, for example
with care. In Egyptian, the same can be achieved by adding bi- ‫ ﺑِـ‬at the start of the word.

bihazar fatah ilAalba bihazar
with care he opened the box carefully
‫ﺑـِﺤـَﺬ َر‬ ‫ﻓـَﺘـَﺢ ا ِﻟﻌـَﻠﺒـَﺔ ﺑـِﺤـَﺬ َر‬
bisurAa 'ahmad biyisu' bisurAa 'awy
with speed Ahmed drives very fast
‫ﺑـِﺴـُﺮﻋـَﺔ‬ ‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﺑـِﯿـِﺴﻮق ﺑـِﺴـُﺮﻋـَﺔ ﻗـَﻮي‬
PRO version
biirraaha
Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API
'ilaAbu biirraaha pdfcrowd.com
biirraaha 'ilaAbu biirraaha
with calm play (pl) quietly!
‫ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﺮا َﺣـَﺔ‬ ‫إﻟـَﻌﺒﻮ ا ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﺮا َﺣـَﺔ‬
il'igtimaeA 'achad saeAa
biizzabt the meeting took exactly one
with precision biizzabt
‫ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﻈـَﺒﻂ‬ hour
‫ا ِﻹﺟﺘـِﻤﺎ َع أﺧـَﺪ ﺳﺎ َﻋـَﺔ ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﻈـَﺒﻂ‬
with bi'iAatidael 'akul bi'iAatidael
eat moderately
moderation ‫ﺑـِﺈﻋـَﺘـِﺪا َل‬ ‫أﻛـُﻞ ﺑـِﺈﻋـَﺘـِﺪا َل‬
biillyl fy hafla biillyl
in the evening there is a party this evening
‫ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟّﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣـَﻔﻠـَﺔ ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟّﯿﻞ‬
Miscellaneous

together sawa 'ihna misaefiryn sawa
we will travel together
(people) ‫ﺳـَﻮَا‬ ‫إﺣﻨﺎ َ ﻣـِﺴﺎ َﻓـِﺮﯾﻦ ﺳـَﻮَا‬
together maAa baAd 'ihna misaefiryn maAa baAd
(people and we will travel together
things)
‫ﻣـَﻊ َ ﺑـَﻌﺾ‬ ‫إﺣﻨﺎ َ ﻣـِﺴﺎ َﻓـِﺮﯾﻦ ﻣـَﻊ َ ﺑـَﻌﺾ‬
kul wahid 'ihna misaefiryn kul wahid
liwahduh we will travel liwahduh
separately
separately
‫ﻛـُﻞ و َﺣـِﺪ ﻟـِﻮ َﺣﺪ ُه‬ ‫إﺣﻨﺎ َ ﻣـِﺴﺎ َﻓـِﺮﯾﻦ ﻛـُﻞ و َﺣـِﺪ ﻟـِﻮ َﺣﺪ ُه‬
kuwayis huwwa biyiGanny kuwayis 'awy
well
he sings very well pdfcrowd.com
well he sings very well
‫ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺲ‬ ‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺑـِﯿـِﻐَـﻨّﻲ ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺲ ﻗـَﻮي‬
Prepositions
Prepositions define a relationship (in time, space,etc) between a noun and something else. In both
english and Egyptian, the preposition goes before the noun that it defines the relationship to. Here
are some examples:
Domain English Egyptian English Egyptian

baAd hiya gaet baAd ilAashaa'
time after she came after dinner
‫ﺑـَﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﺟﺎ َت ﺑـَﻌﺪ ا ِﻟﻌـَﺸﺎ َء‬
wara the garden is behind the ilginyna wara ilbiyt
space behind
‫و َرَا‬ house ‫ا ِﻟﺠـِﻨﯿﻨـَﺔ و َرا َ ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ‬
zayy I need another pen like mihtaeg 'alam thany zayy dah
quality like
‫ز َﯾﻲ‬ this ‫ﻣـِﺤﺘﺎ َج ﻗـَﻠـَﻢ ﺛﺎ َﻧﻲ ز َﯾﻲ د َه‬
hasab kalaem ilbulys, ishshaGab
according hasab according to the police, 'ibtada issaeAa ithnyn
reference
to ‫ ﺣـَﺴـَﺐ‬the riot started at 2am ‫ ا‬،‫ﺣـَﺴـَﺐ ﻛـَﻼ َم ا ِﻟﺒﻮﻟﯿﺲ‬
‫ِلشـَغـَب إبتـَدى ا ِلسا َعـَة ا ِثنين‬
Aand Aandy biyt fy il'aehira
ownership have I have a house in Cairo
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي ﺑـِﯿﺖ ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟﻘﺎ َﻫـِﺮ َة‬
The noun can be one of the following:
Element Preposition English Egyptian

hiya maAa 'ahmad
name Ahmed she is with Ahmed
‫ﻫـِﻲ َ ﻣـَﻊ َ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
il'utta guwwa ilbiyt
simple noun the house the cat is inside the house
‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ﺟُـﻮّا َ ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ‬
wasalt baAd irraagil illy wasal
complex the man I arrived after the man who issigaeda
noun who... delivered the carpet ‫و َﺻـَﻠﺖ ﺑـَﻌﺪ ا ِﻟﺮا َﺟـِﻞ ا ِﻟّﻲ و‬
‫َصـَل ا ِلسـِجا َد َة‬
object wasalt baAdaha
her I arrived after her
pronoun ‫و َﺻـَﻠﺖ ﺑـَﻌﺪ َ َه‬
qualifying mihtaeg 'alam thany zayy dah
this I need another pen like this
pronoun ‫ﻣـِﺤﺘﺎ َج ﻗـَﻠـَﻢ ﺛﺎ َﻧﻲ ز َﯾﻲ د َه‬
Be careful! If it's not a noun, but a complete clause (ie it has a verb), you have to use a
conjunction. In english, it's confusing because the preposition and conjunction are often the same
word: in Egyptian it is necessary to insert the word maa to convert a preposition ot a conjunction.
See more about this below.
Prepositions of time
baAd hanibtidy baAd ilAiyd
after we will start after the feast
‫ﺑـَﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻫـَﻨـِﺒﺘـِﺪي ﺑـَﻌﺪ ا ِﻟﻌـِﯿﺪ‬
'abl I must paint the house before laezim 'adhin ilbiyt 'abl issyf
before
‫ﻗـَﺒﻞ‬ summer ‫ﻻ َز ِم أدﻫـِﻦ ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ ﻗـَﺒﻞ ا ِﻟﺼﯿﻒ‬
athnaa' ittadchyn mamnuA 'athnaa' ilAashaa'
during smoking is forbidden during dinner
‫ا َﺛﻨﺎ َء‬ ‫ا ِﻟﺘـَﺪﺧﯿﻦ ﻣـَﻤﻨﻮع أﺛﻨﺎ َء ا ِﻟﻌـَﺸﺎ َء‬
lihadd 'ana mawgud lihadd ilAashaa'
till I will be here till dinner
‫ﻟـِﺤَـ ّﺪ‬ ‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻣـَﻮﺟﻮد ﻟـِﺤَـ ّﺪ ا ِﻟﻌـَﺸﺎ َء‬
humma mawgudyn liGaeyit saeAa
liGaeyit
till they are busy until 8pm tamanya
‫ﻟـِﻐﺎ َﯾـِﺔ‬
‫ﻫُـ ّﻢ َ ﻣـَﻮﺟﻮدﯾﻦ ﻟـِﻐﺎ َﯾـِﺔ ﺳﺎ َﻋـَﺔ ﺗـَﻤﺎ َﻧﯿـَﺔ‬
Prepositions of space

min huwwa min ilqaahira
from he is from Cairo
‫ﻣـِﻦ‬ ‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻣـِﻦ ا ِﻟﻘﺎ َﻫـِﺮ َة‬
Aan ilkalb garry minny
away from the dog ran away from me
‫ﻋـَﻦ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـَﻠﺐ ﺟَـﺮّي ﻣِـﻨّﻲ‬
Aala irraagil dah bass Aalyna
at/toward that man is looking at us
‫ﻋـَﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺺ ﻋـَﻠﯿﻨَﺎ‬
ّ ‫ا ِﻟﺮا َﺟـِﻞ د َه ﺑَـ‬
fy guzy fy ilbiyt
at my husband is at home
‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻮزي ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ‬
fu' sha''aty fu' ilmaGsala
above my apartment is above the laundry
‫ﻓﻮق‬ ‫ﺷَـﻘﱠـﺘﻲ ﻓﻮق ا ِﻟﻤـَﻐﺴـَﻠـَﺔ‬
taht there are many many fish under the fy samak kityr taht ilmayaeh
below
‫ﺗـَﺤﺖ‬ water ‫ﻓﻲ ﺳـَﻤـَﻚ ﻛـِﺘﯿﺮ ﺗـَﺤﺖ ا ِﻟﻤـَﯿﺎ َه‬
ilmataAm 'usaad mahattit
'usaad the restaurant is opposite the railway il'ataar
opposite
‫ﻗـُﺼﺎ َد‬ station ‫ا ِﻟﻤـَﻄـَﻌﻢ ﻗـُﺼﺎ َد ﻣـَﺤَـﻄﱢـﺔ ا ِﻟﻘـَﻄﺎ‬
‫َر‬
'ubael
opposite
‫ﻗـُﺒﺎ َل‬
fy
ilbiyt fy wishsh issaharaa'
facing wishsh the house is facing the desert
‫ش ا ِﻟﺼـَﺤـَﺮا َء‬
ّ ِ ‫ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ ﻓﻲ و‬
‫ش‬
ّ ِ ‫ﻓﻲ و‬
maktab ilgamaarik Aand
Aand
at ilmataar
‫ ﻋـَﻨﺪ‬the customs office is at the airport
‫ﻣـَﻜﺘـَﺐ ا ِﻟﺠـَﻤﺎ َر ِك ﻋـَﻨﺪ ا ِﻟﻤـَﻄﺎ َر‬
chushsh yimyn Aand
Aand
at turn right at the pharmacy issayidaliya
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺶ ﯾـِﻤﯿﻦ ﻋـَﻨﺪ ا ِﻟﺼـَﯿـِﺪ َﻟـِﯿـَﺔ‬
ّ ‫ﺧُـ‬
wara il'utta waraaky
behind the cat is behind you (f)
‫و َرَا‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ و َرا َﻛﻲ‬
gamb there was an accident beside the kaen fy hadtha ganb ilgamAa
beside
‫ﺟـَﻤﺐ‬ mosque ‫ﻛﺎ َن ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎ َدﺛـَﺔ ﺟـَﻨﺐ ا ِﻟﺠﺎ َﻣ َﻊ‬
fy ilkalb fy ilginyna
in the dog is in the garden
‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـَﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟﺠـِﻨﯿﻨـَﺔ‬
guwa laezim ni'Aud guwa ilbiyt
inside we must stay inside the house
‫ﺟـُﻮَا‬ ‫ﻻ َز ِم ﻧـِﻘﻌـُﺪ ﺟـُﻮا َ ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ‬
bara Aaeyiz haga min baraa?
outside do you want anything from outside?
‫ﺑـَﺮَا‬ ‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ ﺣـَﺠـَﺔ ﻣـِﻦ ﺑـَﺮا َ؟‬
Aala ilAysh Aala ittarabyza
on the bread is on the table
‫ﻋـَﻠﻰ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻌﯿﺶ ﻋـَﻠﻰ ا ِﻟﺘـَﺮ َﺑﯿﺰ َة‬
ilGarda'a byn issaharaa' wa
byn Hurghada is between the desert and ilbahr
between
‫ﺑﯿﻦ‬ the sea ‫ا ِﻟﻐـَﺮد َﻗـَﺔ ﺑﯿﻦ ا ِﻟﺼـَﺤـَﺮا َء و َ ا‬
‫ِلبـَحر‬
fy Aawamyd nur biittul
biittul ishshaariA
biittul ishshaariA
along there are lamp posts all along the street
‫ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﻄﻮل‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋـَﻮا َﻣﯿﺪ ﻧﻮر ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﻄﻮل ا ِﻟﺸﺎ‬
‫َر ِع‬
ilmanzar hawalyn ilbiyt gamyl
hawalyn The view surrounding the house is 'awy
surrounding
‫ ﺣـَﻮ َﻟﯿﻦ‬very beautiful ‫ا ِﻟﻤـَﻨﻈـَﺮ ﺣـَﻮ َﻟﯿﻦ ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺟـَﻤﯿﻞ ﻗـَﻮي‬
Note that you don't need a prepositional to after words like raah ‫ را َح‬- go.
I am going to Cairo
aacnaa raayiH iil-Qaahirao
Miscellaneous Prepositions

'amae...
fa...
concerning
٫٫٫َ ‫أﻣﺎ‬
٫٫٫َ‫ﻓـ‬
zayy Aandak haega zayy dih?
like do you have something like this?
‫ز َﯾﻲ‬ ‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ َك ﺣﺎ َﺟـَﺔ ز َﯾﻲ د ِه؟‬
fy fy bu'Aa Aala il'amys dih
there is there is a stain on this shirt
there is there is a stain on this shirt
‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑـُﻘﻌـَﺔ ﻋـَﻠﻰ ا ِﻟﻘـَﻤﯿﺺ د ِه‬
Aan I am reading a book about the ba'ra kitaeb Aan iththura
about
‫ﻋـَﻦ‬ revolution ‫ﺑـَﻘﺮا َ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب ﻋـَﻦ ا ِﻟﺜﻮر َة‬
hasab kalaem 'ahmad, haykun fy
according hasab according to Ahmed, it will be hawaa' kityr bukrah
to ‫ﺣـَﺴـَﺐ‬ windy tomorrow ‫ ﺣـَﯿﻜﻮن ﻓﻲ ﻫـَﻮا َء‬،‫ﺣـَﺴـَﺐ ﻛـَﻼ َم أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
‫ﻛـِﺘﯿﺮ ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه‬
Aaks r'ayy Aaks r'ayak
contrary my opinion is contrary to yours
‫ﻋـَﻜﺲ‬ ‫رأﯾﻲ ﻋـَﻜﺲ رأﯾـَﻚ‬
'ila there is no food except this mafish akl 'ila ilAayshsh dah
except
‫ﻻ‬
َ‫إ‬ bread ‫ﺶ د َه‬
ّ ‫ﻣـَﻔـِﺶ ا َﻛﻞ إﻻ َ ا ِﻟﻌـَﯿ‬
maAada
except
‫ﻣـَﻌـَﺪَا‬
baddal 'idyna firaach baddal illahma
instead of give us chicken instead of beef
‫ﺑَـ ّﺪ َل‬ ‫إدﯾﻨﺎ َ ﻓـِﺮا َخ ﺑَـ ّﺪ َل ا ِﻟﱠـﺤﻤـَﺔ‬
biirraGm
min nigih biirraGm min ziraaAuh ilmaksur
despite he succeeded despite his injuries
‫ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﺮ َﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﻧـِﺠـِﺢ ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﺮ َﻏﻢ ﻣـِﻦ ذ ِرا َﻋـُﻪ ا ِﻟﻤـَﻜﺴﻮر‬
‫ﻣـِﻦ‬
fy Aashara duyuf zae'yid 'ithnyn
zae'yid there are ten guests plus two muwazafyn
plus
‫زا َﺋـِﺪ‬ staff ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋـَﺸـَﺮ َة ﺿـُﯿﻮف زا َﺋـِﺪ إﺛﻨﯿﻦ ﻣـُﻮ‬
‫َظـَفين‬
Prepositions of ownership
This important group is discussed in more detail in the section on ownership.

Aand Aandy Aarabiya
own I own a car
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي ﻋـَﺮ َﺑـِﯿـَﺔ‬
maAa maAayah walaeAa
have with you I have a cigarette lighter
‫ﻣَـ َﻊ‬ ‫ﻣـَﻌـَﯿـَﻪ و َﻻ َﻋـَﺔ‬
ly ly riglyn
have got I have two legs
‫ﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻲ ر ِﺟﻠﯿﻦ‬
Aalashaen kaen fy mukalma Aalashaenak
for there was a phone call for you
‫ﻋـَﻠـَﺸﺎ َن‬ ‫ﻛﺎ َن ﻓﻲ ﻣـُﻜـَﻠﻤـَﺔ ﻋـَﻠـَﺸﺎ َﻧـَﻚ‬
Subordinate clauses: maa
A preposition connects a noun to a sentence. If you want to connect a clause (something with a
verb) to a sentence, you need to use a conjunction.
In English, many conjunctions are the same as prepositions: In Egyptian, some prepositions can be
converted to a conjunction by adding the word ma ‫ﻣَﺎ‬. Here are some examples:

'iGsil iydyk 'abl ilAashaa'
preposition wash your hands before dinner
‫إﻏﺴـِﻞ ا ِﯾﺪﯾﻚ ﻗـَﺒﻞ ا ِﻟﻌـَﺸﺎ َء‬
'iGsil iydyk 'abl ma taekul
conjunction wash your hands before you eat
‫إﻏﺴـِﻞ ا ِﯾﺪﯾﻚ ﻗـَﺒﻞ ﻣﺎ َ ﺗﺎ َﻛـُﻞ‬
hiya wasalit baAd ilmasarahiya
preposition she arrived after the bus
‫ﻫـِﻲ َ و َﺻـَﻠـِﺖ ﺑـَﻌﺪ ا ِﻟﻤـَﺴـَﺮ َﺣـِﯿـَﺔ‬
hiya wasalit baAd ma ilmasrahiya 'ibtadit
conjunction she arrived after the bus had gone
‫ﻫـِﻲ َ و َﺻـَﻠـِﺖ ﺑـَﻌﺪ ﻣﺎ َ ا ِﻟﻤـَﺴﺮ َﺣـِﯿـَﺔ إﺑﺘـَﺪ ِت‬
biyitsarraf zayy ilmaelik
preposition he acts like the owner
‫ﺑـِﯿـِﺘﺼَـ ّﺮ َف ز َﯾﻲ ا ِﻟﻤﺎ َﻟـِﻚ‬
biyitsarraf zayy ma yikun ilmakaen bitaeAuh
conjunction he acts as if he owns the place
‫ﺑـِﯿـِﺘﺼَـ ّﺮ َف ز َﯾﻲ ﻣﺎ َ ﯾـِﻜﻮن ا ِﻟﻤـَﻜﺎ َن ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋـُﻪ‬
yikun ‫ ﯾـِﻜﻮن‬is added in the last example because it is something that is unlikely to happen. See kaan
for more details.
Conjunctions
Conjunctions are the useful little words that join clauses together to make more complex sentences.
I want to make bread but I don't have enough flour

Aaayiz aacAamil Aiysh lakin maAandysh diqyq kifaayao
Part English Egyptian

Aaeyiz 'aAamil Aiysh
Main clause I want to make bread
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ أﻋـَﻤـِﻞ ﻋـِﯿﺶ‬
lakin
Conjunction but
maAandysh di'y' kifaeya
Second clause I don't have enough flour
‫ﻣـَﻌـَﻨﺪﯾﺶ د ِﻗﯿﻖ ﻛـِﻔﺎ َﯾـَﺔ‬
If you just want to attach a noun, you should use a preposition, but if you want to attach a clause
(ie, there is a verb on both sides), then a conjunction is required. In English, the same word is often
used for both preposition and conjunction, but there are differences in Egyptian: see prepositions
and conjunctions for more details.
If there is a subject pronoun in the second clause, it becomes an object pronoun attached to the
conjunction. For example:
I feared that she was lost

aanaa Kuft iinnahaa tikwn taahit
The following table lists most of the common conjunctions, and gives examples how they can be
used.
English Egyptian English Example Egyptian Example

'inn ana chuft 'innaha tikun taehit
that I feared that she was lost
‫ن‬
ّ‫إ‬ ‫ا َﻧﺎ َ ﺧـُﻔﺖ إﻧﱠـﻬﺎ َ ﺗـِﻜﻮن ﺗﺎ َﻫـِﺖ‬
tul ma bitis'y ilginyna, izzaraA
as long tul ma as long as you water the garden, hayikbar
as ‫ﻃﻮل ﻣَﺎ‬ the plants will grow ‫ ا ِﻟﺰ َر‬،‫ﻃﻮل ﻣﺎ َ ﺑـِﺘـِﺴﻘﻲ ا ِﻟﺠـِﻨﯿﻨـَﺔ‬
‫َع حـَيـِكبـَر‬
Aalashaen maAndysh Aarabiya Aalashaen
‫ﻋـَﻠـَﺸﺎ َن‬ I don't have a car because there is mafiysh filus kifaeya
because ‫ﻣـَﻌﻨﺪﯾﺶ ﻋـَﺮ َﺑـِﯿـَﺔ ﻋـَﻠـَﺸﺎ َن ﻣـَﻔـِﯿﺶ‬
not enough money
pronounced
Aashaen
‫ﻓـِﻠﻮس ﻛـِﻔﺎ َﯾـَﺔ‬
mihtaeg filus Aalashaen 'ashtiry
in order Aalashaen
I need money in order to buy food 'akl
to ‫ﻋـَﻠـَﺸﺎ َن‬
‫ﻣـِﺤﺘﺎ َج ﻓـِﻠﻮس ﻋـَﻠـَﺸﺎ َن أﺷﺘـِﺮي أﻛﻞ‬
baAd ma we will leave after the movie has hanimshy bAad ma ilfylm yichlas
after
‫ﺑـَﻌﺪ ﻣَﺎ‬ finished ‫ﺣـَﻨـِﻤﺸﻲ ﺑﻌـَﺪ ﻣﺎ َ ا ِﻟﻔﯿﻠﻢ ﯾـِﺨﻠـَﺺ‬
wi I went to the bank and it was raht ilbank wi kaen ma'ful
and
‫ِو‬ closed ‫ر َﺣﺖ ا ِﻟﺒـَﻨﻚ و ِ ﻛﺎ َن ﻣـَﻘﻔﻮل‬
Aala 'inn
as if
‫ن‬
ّ ‫ﻋـَﻠﻰ إ‬
kae'inn biyusrif filus kae'innuh Gany
as if he spends money as if he is rich
‫ن‬
ّ ‫ﻛﺎ َإ‬ ‫ﺑـِﯿـُﺼﺮ ِف ﻓـِﻠﻮس ﻛﺎ َإﻧﱡـﻪ ﻏـَﻨﻲ‬
biyusrif filus zayy ma yikun Gany
zayy ma
as if he spends money as if he is rich ‫ﺑـِﯿـُﺼﺮ ِف ﻓـِﻠﻮس ز َﯾﻲ ﻣﺎ َ ﯾـِﻜﻮن‬
‫ز َﯾﻲ ﻣَﺎ‬
‫ﻏـَﻨﻲ‬
'abl ma
before
‫ﻗـَﺒﻞ ﻣَﺎ‬
bass I would like to go but I don't have nifsy aaruh bass maAandysh wa't
but
‫ﺲ‬
ّ ‫ﺑَـ‬ time ‫ﺲ ﻣـَﻌـَﻨﺪﯾﺶ و َﻗﺖ‬
ّ ‫ﻧـِﻔﺴﻲ ا َروح ﺑَـ‬
lakin
but ditto
'in 'inn ruht hinaek, haetit chaani'
if If you go, you will get into a fight
‫إن‬ ‫ ﺣﺎ َﺗـِﺖ ﺧﺎ َﻧـِﻖ‬،‫ن روﺣﺖ ﻫـِﻨﺎ َك‬
ّ‫إ‬
'iza kaen maAaek filus, salifny
'iza if you have some money, lend me chamsyn ginya
if
‫إذَا‬ fifty pounds ‫ ﺳـَﻠـِﻔﻨﻲ‬،‫إذا َ ﻛﺎ َن ﻣـَﻌﺎ َك ﻓـِﻠﻮس‬
‫ﺧـَﻤﺴﯿﻦ ﺟـِﻨﯿـَﺔ‬
instead badal ma badal ma matruh, kalimhum
instead of going, call them
instead
instead of going, call them
of ‫ﺑـَﺪ َل ﻣَﺎ‬ ‫ ﻛـَﻠـِﻤﻬـُﻢ‬،‫ﺑـَﺪ َل ﻣﺎ َ ﻣـَﺘﺮوح‬
zayy ma Aamalt fyh hayitAamil
zay ma as you did for him, he will do for
like fyk
‫ز َي ﻣَﺎ‬ you
‫ز َﯾﻲ ﻣﺎ َ ﻋـَﻤـَﻠﺖ ﻓﯿﻪ ﻫـَﯿـِﺘﻌـَﻤـِﻞ ﻓﯿﻚ‬
lae... la dah naefaA walaeh dah
neither.. walaeh.. neither this is working nor is this biyinfaA
nor.. working
٫٫‫ و َﻻ َه‬٫٫٫َ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻻ َ د َه ﻧﺎ َﻓـَﻊ و َﻻ َه د َه ﺑـِﯿـِﻨﻔـَﻊ‬
'aw mumkin naekul samak 'aw firaach
or we can eat fish or chicken
‫أو‬ ‫ﻣـُﻤﻜـِﻦ ﻧﺎ َﻛـُﻞ ﺳـَﻤـَﻚ أو ﻓـِﺮا َخ‬
Aaewiz taekul samak wala
or (in wala
would you like fish or chicken? firaach?
question) ‫ﻻ‬
َ َ‫و‬
‫ﻋﺎ َو ِز ﺗﺎ َﻛـُﻞ ﺳـَﻤـَﻚ و َﻻ َ ﻓـِﺮا َخ؟‬
rather 'ahsan I would prefer to eat fish rather 'akul issamak 'ahsan min ilfiraach
than ‫أﺣﺴـَﻦ‬ than chicken ‫أﻛـُﻞ ا ِﻟﺴـَﻤـَﻚ أﺣﺴـَﻦ ﻣـِﻦ ا ِﻟﻔـِﺮا َخ‬
wa 'illa 'ichrassy wa 'illa haarawahik
otherwise shut up otherwise we go home!
‫ﻻ‬
‫وَ إ ﱠ‬ ‫ﻻ َ ﻫﺎ َر َو َﺣـِﻚ‬
ّ ‫إﺧﺮ َﺳّﻲ و َ إ‬
matidyhush filus 'ila 'iza 'ana
'ila 'iza don't give him any money unless I samahtylak
unless
‫إﻻ َ إذَا‬ allow you to َ ‫ﻣـَﺘـِﺪﯾﻬﻮش ﻓـِﻠﻮس إﻻ َ إذا َ أﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺳـَﻤـَﺤﺘﯿﻠـَﻚ‬
conditional clauses (if.. then...)
There are two words meaning if: they are 'iza ‫ إذَا‬and law ‫ﻟـَﻮ‬. 'iza ‫ إذَا‬can be used under all
circumstances: law ‫ ﻟـَﻮ‬cannot be used with the imperfect form of a verb or a preposition.
In English, the word then is occasionally used to complement if In Egyptian, there is no equivalent
word.
If I were rich...
If an event or situation is improbable or impossible, in English we use modals like 'would' and 'were'.
In Egyptian, the word kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬is used after law ‫ﻟـَﻮ‬. Compare these two sentences:
if I have time, I will read the book

iicdhaa Aandy waqt, haaqraac iil-kitaab
if I had time, I would read the book

law kaan Aandy waqt, kunt qaryt iil-kitaab
When conditional clause

past 'iza kaen ‫ إذا َ ﻛﺎ َن‬+ perfect
present 'iza kaen ‫ إذا َ ﻛﺎ َن‬+ imperfect
future 'iza kaen ‫ إذا َ ﻛﺎ َن‬+ imperfect
Courtesies
This section summarises the expressions that are used daily to greet and say goodbye to people,
ask for things and thank people on a day to day basis.
Religion
Religion is very important in Egypt. There are several phrases that you will hear regularly in any
conversation.
Egyptian English
ilhamdu lillah
thanks to Allah
‫ا ِﻟﺤـَﻤﺪ ُ ﻟِـﻠﱠـﻪ‬
'allah yisalaemak
may god protect you m
‫أﻟﱠـﻪ ﯾـِﺴـَﻼ َﻣـَﻚ‬
'allah yisalaemik
may god protect you f
‫أﻟﱠـﻪ ﯾـِﺴـَﻼ َﻣـِﻚ‬
'inn shaa' 'allah
god willing
‫ن ﺷﺎ َء أﻟﱠـﻪ‬
ّ‫إ‬
ya rab
Oh god!
‫ﯾﺎ َ ر َب‬
rabbina
rabbina
our god!
‫ر َﺑﱢـﻨَﺎ‬
issalaem Aalykum
greeting
‫ا ِﻟﺴـَﻼ َم ﻋـَﻠﯿﻜـُﻢ‬
peace be with you m/f
Aalykum issalaem
response
‫ﻋـَﻠﯿﻜـُﻢ ا ِﻟﺴـَﻼ َم‬
Addressing somebody
ya ‫ ﯾَﺎ‬is often used before somebody's name or title as a greeting
Egyptian English
ya 'ahmad
hey, Ahmad!
‫ﯾﺎ َ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
ya rayis
hey, boss!
‫ﯾﺎ َ ر َﯾـِﺲ‬
ya 'ustah
driver!
‫ﯾﺎ َ أ ُﺳﻄـَﻪ‬
ya 'ustaez hey mister(teacher)!
‫ﯾﺎ َ أ ُﺳﺘﺎ َذ‬ to a respectable person
ya 'ustaeza
‫ﯾﺎ َ أ ُﺳﺘﺎ َذ‬
‫ ﯾﺎ َ أ ُﺳﺘﺎ َذ‬hey madam!
‫َة‬
basha
pasha m/f
‫ﺑﺎ َﺷَﺎ‬
In addition to the standard pronouns for you, there are some more formal versions:
Egyptian English
'inta
you m
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬
'inti
informal you f
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬
'intu
you pl
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬
hadritak
‫ ﺣـَﻀﺮ‬sir
‫ِتـَك‬
hadritik
‫ ﺣـَﻀﺮ‬madam
‫ِتـِك‬
formal
siyadtak
siyadtak
sir
‫ﺳـِﯿـَﺪﺗـَﻚ‬
siyadtik
madam
‫ﺳـِﯿـَﺪﺗـِﻚ‬
'afandim
Sir/Madam
‫أﻓـَﻨﺪ ِم‬
Greetings
To welcome somebody, you can use one of these phrases...
Egyptian English
'ahlaen wa sahlaen
greeting welcome and ease
‫ﻼ‬
ً ‫ﻼ و َ ﺳـَﻬ‬
ً ‫أﻫ‬
'ahlaen wa sahlaen
response welcome and ease
‫ﻼ‬
ً ‫ﻼ و َ ﺳـَﻬ‬
ً ‫أﻫ‬
'ahlaen byk
response welcome to you m
‫ﻼ ﺑﯿﻚ‬
ً ‫أﻫ‬
'ahlaen byky
response welcome to you f
‫ﻼ ﺑﯿﻜﻲ‬
ً ‫أﻫ‬
hamd illah Aala salamtak
greeting thank god for protecting you m
greeting thank god for protecting you m
‫لـَه عـَلى سـَلا َمتـَك‬
ّ ِ ‫ﺣـَﻤﺪ‬
hamd illah Aala salamtik
greeting thank god for protecting you f
‫لـَه عـَلى سـَلا َمتـِك‬
ّ ِ ‫ﺣـَﻤﺪ‬
Whenever you meet somebody that you already know, you should shake hands (very gently) and
use one of the following greetings.
Before sunset, the following informal greetings are used:
Egyptian English
sabaeh ilchyr
greeting a day of wellbeing
‫ﺻـَﺒﺎ َح ا ِﻟﺨﯿﺮ‬
sabaeh innur
response a day of light
‫ﺻـَﺒﺎ َح ا ِﻟﻨﻮر‬
sabaeh il'ishta
response a day of cream
‫ﺻـَﺒﺎ َح ا ِﻟﻘـِﺸﻄـَﺔ‬
sabaeh ilful
response a day of daisies
‫ﺻـَﺒﺎ َح ا ِﻟﻔـُﻞ‬
After sunset, the following informal greetings may be used: I have heard them very rarely, though.
Egyptian English
misaa' ilchyr
greeting an evening of wellbeing
‫ﻣـِﺴﺎ َء ا ِﻟﺨﯿﺮ‬
misaa' ilchyr
response an evening of wellbeing
‫ﻣـِﺴﺎ َء ا ِﻟﺨﯿﺮ‬
misaa' ilful
response an evening of daisies
‫ﻣـِﺴﺎ َء ا ِﻟﻔـُﻞ‬
Next, you should ask how they are:
Egyptian English
Aaemil 'iyh?
question what are you m doing?
‫ﻋﺎ َﻣـِﻞ إﯾﻪ؟‬
Aaemila 'iyh?
question what are you f doing?
‫ﻋﺎ َﻣـِﻠـَﺔ إﯾﻪ؟‬
'izayak?
question how are you m
‫إز َﯾـَﻚ؟‬
'izayik?
question how are you f
‫إز َﯾـِﻚ؟‬
il'achbaar 'iyh?
question what's new?
‫ا ِﻷﺧﺒﺎ َر إﯾﻪ؟‬
kuluh tamaem, ilhamdu lillah
response all ok, thank god
‫ ا ِﻟﺤـَﻤﺪ ُ ﻟِـﻠﱠـﻪ‬،‫ﻛـُﻠـُﻪ ﺗـَﻤﺎ َم‬
miya miya, ilhamdu lillah
response 100% thank god
‫ ا ِﻟﺤـَﻤﺪ ُ ﻟِـﻠﱠـﻪ‬،‫ﻣـِﯿـَﺔ ﻣـِﯿـَﺔ‬
kuwayis, ilhamdu lillah
response I m am good, thank god
‫ ا ِﻟﺤـَﻤﺪ ُ ﻟِـﻠﱠـﻪ‬،‫ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺲ‬
kuwayisa, ilhamdu lillah
response I fgood, thank god
‫ ا ِﻟﺤـَﻤﺪ ُ ﻟِـﻠﱠـﻪ‬،‫ﻛـُﻮ َﯾـِﺴـَﺔ‬
nus nus
response half and half
‫ﻧـُﺺ ﻧـُﺺ‬
mish battaal
response not bad
‫ﻣـِﺶ ﺑَـﻄّﺎ َل‬
wa 'inta?
question and you m?
‫و َ إﻧﺖ َ؟‬
wa 'inti?
question and you f?
‫و َ إﻧﺖ ِ؟‬
If you know them well, you should ask how their wives, children, etc...
Introductions
Egyptian English
'ismak 'iyh?
what is your m name?
‫إﺳﻤـَﻚ إﯾﻪ؟‬
'ismik 'iyh?
what is your f name?
‫إﺳﻤـِﻚ إﯾﻪ؟‬
'ismy ...
my name is ...
٫٫٫ ‫إﺳﻤﻲ‬
tisharrafna
pleased to meet you
‫ﺗـِﺸَـ ّﺮ َﻓﻨَﺎ‬
Making you comfortable
Egyptian English
'istirayah
make yourself m comfortable
‫إﺳﺘـِﺮ َﯾـَﺢ‬
'istirayahy
make yourself f comfortable
‫إﺳﺘـِﺮ َﯾـَﺤﻲ‬
tishrab 'iyh?
what will you m drink?
‫ﺗـِﺸﺮ َب إﯾﻪ؟‬
tishraby 'iyh?
what will you f drink?
what will you f drink?
‫ﺗـِﺸﺮ َﺑﻲ إﯾﻪ؟‬
Meal time
Egyptians normally have two big meals a day, plus a snack before bedtime.
English Time Types of food Egyptian

bread with salads, dips, luncheon meats, omelette with fitaar
breakfast 11-12am
bastirma, tamiyya ‫ﻓـِﻄﺎ َر‬
breakfast 'iftaar
sunset cooked meat, rice and vegetables, juice, sweet things
(Ramadan) ‫إﻓﻄﺎ َر‬
Gada
lunch 5-8pm cooked meat or fish, rice and vegetables
‫ﻏـَﺪَا‬
before Aasha
dinner yogurt, fruit
sleeping ‫ﻋـَﺸَﺎ‬
Here are some expressions that are often used around meal times
Egyptian When to say it

biilhanna wa ishshiffa
remark before or after eating
‫ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﻬَـﻨّﺎ َ و َ ا ِﻟﺸِـﻔﱠﺎ‬
sufrah daeymaen say to host
remark before leaving table
‫ﺳـُﻔﺮ َه دا َﯾﻤًﺎ‬ like "thanks for the meal"
biilhanna wa ishshiffa
response
‫ﺑـِﺎ ِﻟﻬَـﻨّﺎ َ و َ ا ِﻟﺸِـﻔﱠﺎ‬
Please
Egyptian English
Aan 'iznak
to m
‫ ﻋـَﻦ إذﻧـَﻚ‬excuse me
Aan 'iznik to get past someone
to f
‫ﻋـَﻦ إذﻧـِﻚ‬
law samaht
to m
‫ﻟـَﻮ ﺳـَﻤـَﺤﺖ‬
please
law samahty
to f
‫ﻟـَﻮ ﺳـَﻤـَﺤﺘﻲ‬
min fadlak
to m
‫ﻣـِﻦ ﻓـَﻀﻠـَﻚ‬
please
min fadlik
to f
‫ﻣـِﻦ ﻓـَﻀﻠـِﻚ‬
mumkin...
request Please could you/I.....
٫٫٫‫ﻣـُﻤﻜـِﻦ‬
mumkin
response Yes (it's possible)
‫ﻣـُﻤﻜـِﻦ‬
Thank you
Egyptian English
shukraan
remark
‫ﺷـُﻜﺮًا‬
'alf shukr
remark
‫أﻟﻒ ﺷـُﻜﺮ‬
mutshakir a'wy
remark
‫ﻣـُﺘﺸـَﻜـِﺮ ا َ ي‬
Aafwaen don't mention it
reply
‫ﻋـَﻔﻮًا‬ you are welcome
ilAafw
reply you are welcome
‫ا ِﻟﻌـَﻔﻮ‬
Goodbyes
Egyptian English
maAa issalaema
remark with safety
‫ﻣـَﻊ َ ا ِﻟﺴـَﻼ َﻣـَﺔ‬
maAa issalaema
reply with safety
‫ﻣـَﻊ َ ا ِﻟﺴـَﻼ َﻣـَﺔ‬
hashufak 'imtae?
When will I see you f?
‫ﻫـَﺸﻮﻓـَﻚ إﻣﺘﺎ َ؟‬
hashufik 'imtae?
When will I see you f?
‫ﻫـَﺸﻮﻓـِﻚ إﻣﺘﺎ َ؟‬
hashufak baAdyn
See you m later
‫ﻫـَﺸﻮﻓـَﻚ ﺑـَﻌﺪﯾﻦ‬
hashufik baAdyn
See you f later
‫ﻫـَﺸﻮﻓـِﻚ ﺑـَﻌﺪﯾﻦ‬
Achievement
Egyptian English
hazz saAyd
good luck!
‫ﻆ ﺳـَﻌﯿﺪ‬
ّ ‫ﺣَـ‬
mabruk
remark congratulations
remark congratulations
‫ﻣـَﺒﺮوك‬
'allah yibaarak fyk
response god bless you m
‫أﻟﱠـﻪ ﯾـِﺒﺎ َر َك ﻓﯿﻚ‬
'allah yibaarik fyky
response god bless you f
‫أﻟﱠـﻪ ﯾـِﺒﺎ َر ِك ﻓﯿﻜﻲ‬
Occasions
Egyptian English
kul sana wa 'inta tayib every year and you are happy
‫ ﻛـُﻞ ﺳـَﻨـَﺔ و َ إﻧﺖ َ ﻃـَﯿـِﺐ‬birthdays, new year, feasts
ramadaan karym
remark during ramadan
‫ر َﻣـَﻀﺎ َن ﻛـَﺮﯾﻢ‬
'allah 'akram
response during ramadan
‫أﻟﱠـﻪ أﻛﺮ َم‬
Opinions
Egyptian English
'iyh r'ayak?
question what do you m think?
‫إﯾﻪ رأﯾـَﻚ؟‬
'iyh r'ayik?
question what do you f think?
‫إﯾﻪ رأﯾـِﻚ؟‬
tamaem?
question OK?
‫ﺗـَﻤﺎ َم؟‬
tamaem kidah?
question Ok like this?
‫ﺗـَﻤﺎ َم ﻛـِﺪ َه؟‬
'aywa
response yes
‫أﯾﻮَا‬
mashy It goes
response
‫ﻣﺎ َﺷﻲ‬ ok
tamaem
response good
‫ﺗـَﻤﺎ َم‬
tayib
response fine
‫ﻃـَﯿـِﺐ‬
haadir
response right away
‫ﺣﺎ َﺿـِﺮ‬
mayinfaAsh
response it's no use
‫ﻣـَﯿـِﻨﻔـَﻌﺶ‬
mish mumkin
response not possible
‫ﻣـِﺶ ﻣـُﻤﻜـِﻦ‬
laa'
response no
‫ﻻ َء‬
laa' 'abadaen
response never!
‫ﻻ َء أﺑـَﺪًا‬
'aha
response offensive way of disagreeing
‫أﺣَﺎ‬
Aafwaen? Pardon?
response
‫ﻋـَﻔﻮاً؟‬ if you didn't hear
'ana mish 'akyd
response I m/f am not sure
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻣـِﺶ أﻛﯿﺪ‬
'ana mish Aaarif
response I m don't know
'ana mish Aaarifa
response I f don't know
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻣـِﺶ ﻋﺎ َر ِﻓـَﺔ‬
'ana mish faehim
response I m don't understand
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻣـِﺶ ﻓﺎ َﻫـِﻢ‬
'ana mish faehima
response I f don't understand
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻣـِﺶ ﻓﺎ َﻫـِﻤـَﺔ‬
Hassle
'imshy
go away!
‫إﻣﺸﻲ‬
chalaas kidah
stop this
‫ﺧـَﻼ َص ﻛـِﺪ َه‬
haraam Aalyk
shame on you m!
‫ﺣـَﺮا َم ﻋـَﻠﯿﻚ‬
haraam Aalyky
shame on you f!
‫ﺣـَﺮا َم ﻋـَﻠﯿﻜﻲ‬
chalyk muhtaram
‫ ﺧـَﻠﯿﻚ ﻣـُﺤﺘـَﺮ َم‬be respectful!
if a man gets
'ihtirim nafsak over-friendly to a woman
‫إﺣﺘـِﺮ ِم ﻧـَﻔﺴـَﻚ‬
Insults
humaar donkey
remark
‫ﺣـُﻤﺎ َر‬ offensive
'ibn marah your father is a woman
remark
‫إﺑﻦ ﻣـَﺮ َه‬ very offensive
'ibn sharmuta son of a whore/bitch
PRO version
remark
remark
‫ إﺑﻦ ﺷـَﺮﻣﻮﻃـَﺔ‬very offensive
'ifandim???
response pardon????
‫إﻓـَﻨﺪ ِم؟؟؟‬
Negation
The word mish ‫ ﻣـِﺶ‬is used to negate a phrase. It is either placed in front of the verb or preposition,
or wrapped around it.
Structure English Arabic

Aandy sagaeyar
I have cigarettes
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي ﺳـَﺠﺎ َﯾـَﺮ‬
maAandysh sagaeyar
I don't have any cigarettes
‫ﻣـَﻌـَﻨﺪﯾﺶ ﺳـَﺠﺎ َﯾـَﺮ‬
Preposition
fy mayaeh
There is water
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣـَﯿﺎ َه‬
mafysh mayaeh
There is no water
‫ﻣـَﻔﯿﺶ ﻣـَﯿﺎ َه‬
'ana kunt hinaek
I was there
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻛـُﻨﺖ ﻫـِﻨﺎ َك‬
kaan
'ana makuntish hinaek
'ana makuntish hinaek
I was not there
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻣـَﻜـُﻨﺘـِﺶ ﻫـِﻨﺎ َك‬
'ana shuft 'ahmad
I saw Ahmed
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﺷـُﻔﺖ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
perfect
'ana mashuftish 'ahmad
I did not see Ahmed
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻣـَﺸـُﻔﺘـِﺶ أﺣﻤـَﺪ‬
'ana Aaarif
I know
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِف‬
participle 'ana mish Aaarif
I do not know
aacnaa maAaarifsh
Aaeyiz yaekul
He wants to eat
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ ﯾﺎ َﻛـُﻞ‬
mish Aaeyiz yaekul
imperfect He does not want to eat
‫ﻣـِﺶ ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ ﯾﺎ َﻛـُﻞ‬
mayaekulsh
he must not eat
‫ﻣـَﯿﺎ َﻛـُﻠﺶ‬
bahibb ilkitaeb dah
I like this book
‫ﺐ ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب د َه‬
ّ ‫ﺑـَﺤِـ‬
mabahibbsh ilkitaeb dah
‫ﻣـَﺒـَﺤِـﺒّﺶ ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب د َه‬
bi-imperfect
I do not like this book less common...
mish bahibb ilkitaeb dah
‫ﺐ ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب د َه‬
ّ ‫ﻣـِﺶ ﺑـَﺤِـ‬
]
hashtiry ilkitaeb
I will buy the book
‫ﻫﺎ َﺷﺘـِﺮي ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب‬
Ha-imperfect
mish hashtiry ilkitaeb
I will not buy the book
‫ﻣـِﺶ ﻫﺎ َﺷﺘـِﺮي ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب‬
go away! iimshy!
imperative use mish+you-imperfect

don't go! matimshysh
‫ﻣـَﺘـِﻤﺸﯿﺶ‬
Sometimes ma- is used on it own- the -sh does not appear after the word. There are no rules about
when this can happen.
Numbers
Arabic digits are not the same as Roman digits:
Digit English Egyptian
0 sifr
zero
٠ ‫ﺻـِﻔﺮ‬
1 waehid
one
١ ‫وا َﺣـِﺪ‬
2 'itnyn
two
٢ ‫إﺗﻨﯿﻦ‬
3 talaeta
three
٣ ‫ﺗـَﻼ َﺗـَﺔ‬
4 'arbaAa
four
٤ ‫أرﺑـَﻌـَﺔ‬
5 chamsa
five
٥ ‫ﺧـَﻤﺴـَﺔ‬
6 sitta
six
٦ ‫ﺳِـﺘﱠـﺔ‬
7 sabAa
seven
٧ ‫ﺳـَﺒﻌـَﺔ‬
8 tamanya
eight
٨ ‫ﺗـَﻤﺎ َﻧﯿـَﺔ‬
9 tisAa
nine
٩ ‫ﺗـِﺴﻌـَﺔ‬
10 Aashara
ten
١٠ ‫ﻋـَﺸـَﺮ َة‬
Cardinals and Ordinals
In both English and egyptian, there are two forms of number- cardinals and ordinals. Cardinals are
used to count things (one, two, three), Ordinals are used to describe sequence (first, second, etc).
Example Function
Cardinal five used to count things
Ordinal fifth used to describe the order, or position in sequence, of something
Cardinals
Cardinals are used for counting and specifying how many of something. Usage of the first few
numbers is complicated, but it gets easier after that :-). There are special rules for:
People of a particular nationality (eg one englishman)

Quantities- weight, money, and when you are ordering something (eg teas)
People in general (men, women etc)
Things - everything else
The following table gives an overview of the situation:
Quantities Things
People
Nationals weight books
Number Form men
Egyptians money chairs
women
tea minutes
sifr
‫ﺻـِﻔﺮ‬
wazn kutub
mafysh
‫ و َزن‬rigala ‫ﻛـُﺘﻮب‬
zero ‫ﻻ‬
َ َ ‫ ر ِﺟﺎ‬karasy
‫ ﻣـَﻔﯿﺶ‬masriyyin filus
+plural
‫ﻣـَﺼﺮ ِﯾﯿـِﻦ‬ ‫ ﻓـِﻠﻮس‬sittaet ‫ﻛـَﺮا َﺳﻲ‬
noun
shaey
‫ ﺳِـﺘّﺎ َت‬da'aeyi'
‫ﺷﺎ َي‬ ‫د َﻗﺎ َﯾـِﻖ‬
kylw
waehid
‫ﻛﯿﻠﻮ‬
‫ وا َﺣـِﺪ‬masry ginyh
‫ﻣـَﺼﺮي‬ ‫ﺟـِﻨﯿﻪ‬
+sing
noun
shaey
‫ﺷﺎ َي‬
wahda
‫ وا َﺣﺪ َة‬masriya
one
‫ﻣـَﺼﺮ ِﯾـَﺔ‬
+sing
noun
kitaeb
raagil ‫ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
‫ را َﺟـِﻞ‬kursy
ns
on its own
sitt
‫ﻛـُﺮﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺖ‬
ّ ‫ ﺳِـ‬di'y'a
‫د ِﻗﯿﻘـَﺔ‬
'itnyn rigala
‫ إﺗﻨﯿﻦ‬masriyyin ‫ﻻ‬
َ َ ‫ر ِﺟﺎ‬
‫ﻣـَﺼﺮ ِﯾﯿـِﻦ‬ sittaet
+plural
noun ‫ﺳِـﺘّﺎ َت‬
kylw
‫ﻛﯿﻠﻮ‬
'itnyn
‫إﺗﻨﯿﻦ‬ gynyh
+sing
‫ﺟﯿﻨﯿﻪ‬
two noun
shaey
‫ﺷﺎ َي‬
kitabyn
‫ﻛـِﺘﺎ َﺑﯿﻦ‬
kursiyyin
noun-yn ‫ﻛـُﺮﺳـِﯿﯿـِﻦ‬
di'i'tyn
‫د‬
‫ِقـِقتين‬
kylw
masry
‫ﻛﯿﻠﻮ‬
talaeta
‫ﺗـَﻼ َﺗـَﺔ‬ ‫ ﻣـَﺼﺮي‬gynyh
masrya
‫ﺟﯿﻨﯿﻪ‬
+sing
noun ‫ ﻣـَﺼﺮﯾـَﺔ‬shaey
‫ﺷﺎ َي‬
three
kutub
rigala
‫ﻛـُﺘﻮب‬
talat
talat rigala
‫ﺗـَﻠـَﺖ‬ ‫ﻻ‬
َ َ ‫ ر ِﺟﺎ‬karasy
+plural sittaet ‫ﻛـَﺮا َﺳﻲ‬

noun ‫ ﺳِـﺘّﺎ َت‬da'aeyi'
‫د َﻗﺎ َﯾـِﻖ‬
four thru nine, same as 3
Zero
For zero, there is no equivalent of no as in no books. Instead, the verb or preposition is negated
with mish ‫ﻣـِﺶ‬. As in english, the noun is a plural. Alternatively, you can use or without- min Gyr ‫ﻣـِﻦ‬
‫ﻏﯿﺮ‬.
English Egyptian
sifr
zero
‫ﺻـِﻔﺮ‬
mafysh masriyyin
no egyptians (m/f)
‫ﻣـَﻔﯿﺶ ﻣـَﺼﺮ ِﯾﯿـِﻦ‬
wazn
no weight
‫و َزن‬
filus
no money
no money
‫ﻓـِﻠﻮس‬
shaey
no tea
‫ﺷﺎ َي‬
ragala
no men
‫ﻻ‬
َ َ ‫را َﺟﺎ‬
sittaet
no women
‫ﺳِـﺘّﺎ َت‬
kutub
no books
‫ﻛـُﺘﻮب‬
karasy
no chairs
‫ﻛـَﺮا َﺳﻲ‬
da'aeyi'
no seconds
‫د َﻗﺎ َﯾـِﻖ‬
One
The number one has a masculine and feminine form. Both forms are used for people of a particular
nationality eg an englishman.
For weights, money and when ordering things, the masculine form only is used.
In English, we would usually say a book rather than one book: the same is true in Egyptian, but
there is no word for a - the noun is simply used on its own.
English Egyptian
waehid
one
‫وا َﺣـِﺪ‬
waehid masry
one egyptian (m)
‫وا َﺣـِﺪ ﻣـَﺼﺮي‬
one egyptian (f) waHdao maSriyao
a kilo waaHid kylw
a guinea waaHid ginyh
one tea waaHid shaay
a man raagil
a woman sitt
a book kitaab
a chair kursy
a minute diqyqao
Two
For people of a particular nationality, eg two englishmen or two egyptians, use the number 'itnyn ‫إﺗﻨﯿﻦ‬
followed by a plural noun.
For weights, money and orders, use the number 'itnyn ‫ إﺗﻨﯿﻦ‬followed by a singular noun.
For things, you should use the suffix -yn ‫ ـﯿﻦ‬for masculine nouns and -tyn ‫ ـﺘﯿﻦ‬for feminine nouns.
Nouns ending in -y ‫ ـﻲ‬take the ending -iyyin ‫ــِييـِن‬. This is equivalent to a couple which can mean
exactly two, or approximately two.
English Egyptian
'itnyn
two
‫إﺗﻨﯿﻦ‬
'itnyn masryyin
two egyptians (m/f)
‫إﺗﻨﯿﻦ ﻣـَﺼﺮﯾﯿـِﻦ‬
two kilos iictnyn kylw
two guineas iictnyn ginyh
two teas iictnyn shaay
two men iictnyn ragaalaa
two women iictnyn sittaat
two books kitaabyn
two chair kursiyyin
two minutes diqiqtyn
Three to Ten
For People of nationalities, use the number followed by a plural noun.
For weights, money and when ordering things, use the number followed by a singular noun.
For people and things, use the short form listed below followed by a plural noun:
Digit English Egyptian English Egyptian

3 talaeta talat kutub
three three books
٣ ‫ﺗـَﻼ َﺗـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺗـَﻠـَﺖ ﻛـُﺘـُﺐ‬
4 'arbaAa 'arbaAa kutub
four four books
٤ ‫أرﺑـَﻌـَﺔ‬ ‫أرﺑـَﻊ َ ﻛـُﺘـُﺐ‬
5 chamsa chamas kutub
five five books
٥ ‫ﺧـَﻤﺴـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺧـَﻤـَﺲ ﻛـُﺘـُﺐ‬
6 sitta sitt kutub
six six books
٦ ‫ﺳِـﺘﱠـﺔ‬ ‫ﺖ ﻛـُﺘـُﺐ‬
ّ ‫ﺳِـ‬
7 sabAa sabaA kutub
seven seven books
٧ ‫ﺳـَﺒﻌـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺳـَﺒـَﻊ ﻛـُﺘـُﺐ‬
8 tamanya taman kutub
eight eight books
٨ ‫ﺗـَﻤﺎ َﻧﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺗـَﻤـَﻦ ﻛـُﺘـُﺐ‬
9 tisAa tisAa kutub
nine nine books
٩ ‫ﺗـِﺴﻌـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺗـِﺴﻊ َ ﻛـُﺘـُﺐ‬
10 Aashara Aashara kutub
ten ten books
١٠ ‫ﻋـَﺸـَﺮ َة‬ ‫ﻋـَﺸـَﺮ َة ﻛـُﺘـُﺐ‬
Eleven to Ninety Nine
From 11 onwards, if the number is followed by a noun, the noun must be singular:

hidaeshar hidaeshar kitaeb
eleven eleven books
‫ﺣـِﺪا َﺷـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺣـِﺪا َﺷـَﺮ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
'itnaeshar 'itnaeshar kitaeb
twelve twelve books
‫إﺗﻨﺎ َﺷـَﺮ‬ ‫إﺗﻨﺎ َﺷـَﺮ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
talatshar talatshar kitaeb
thirteen thirteen books
‫ﺗـَﻼ َﺗﺸـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺗـَﻼ َﺗﺸـَﺮ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
'arbaAtashar 'arbatAshar kitaeb
fourteen fourteen books
‫أرﺑـَﻌﺘـَﺸـَﺮ‬ ‫أرﺑـَﺘﻌﺸـَﺮ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
chamastashar chamastashar kitaeb
fifteen fifteen books
‫ﺧـَﻤـَﺴﺘـَﺸـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺧـَﻤـَﺴﺘـَﺸـَﺮ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
sittashar sittashar kitaeb
sixteen sixteen books
sixteen sixteen books
‫ﺳِـﺘﱠـﺸـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺳِـﺘﱠـﺸـَﺮ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
sabaAtashar sabaAtashar kitaeb
seventeen seventeen books
‫ﺳـَﺒـَﻌﺘـَﺸـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺳـَﺒـَﻌﺘـَﺸـَﺮ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
tamantashar tamantashar kitaeb
eighteen eighteen books
‫ﺗـَﻤـَﻨﺘـَﺸـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺗـَﻤـَﻨﺘـَﺸـَﺮ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
tisAatashar tisAatashar kitaeb
nineteen nineteen books
‫ﺗـِﺴﻌـَﺘـَﺸـَﺮ‬ ‫ﺗـِﺴﻌـَﺘـَﺸـَﺮ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
The digits in Egyptian numbers are written in the same order as in European numbers. When
expressed as words, however, the two digits are stated as units and tens, as in german not english,
with wa ‫ َو‬in between:
35
٣٥
thirty five
Kamsao wa talatyn
Here are the numbers from 20 to 90:
English Egyptian
Aasharyn
twenty
‫ﻋـَﺸـَﺮﯾﻦ‬
talatyn
talatyn
thirty
‫ﺗـَﻠـَﺘﯿﻦ‬
'arbaAyn
forty
‫أرﺑـَﻌﯿﻦ‬
chamsyn
fifty
‫ﺧـَﻤﺴﯿﻦ‬
sittyn
sixty
‫ﺳِـﺘّﯿﻦ‬
sabaAyn
seventy
‫ﺳـَﺒـَﻌﯿﻦ‬
tamanyn
eighty
‫ﺗـَﻤـَﻨﯿﻦ‬
tisAyn
ninety
‫ﺗـِﺴﻌﯿﻦ‬
Hundreds
Here are the numbers from one to nine hundred. Note that the short form myt ‫ ﻣﯿﺖ‬is used when
hundreds are followed by a noun (which must be singular):
short form
English Egyptian
+ singular noun
miya myt kitaeb
one hundred
‫ﻣـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺖ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
mityn mityn kitaeb
two hundred
‫ﻣـِﺘﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻣـِﺘﯿﻦ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
tultumiya tultumyt kitaeb
three hundred
‫ﺗـُﻠﺘـُﻤـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺗـُﻠﺘـُﻤﯿﺖ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
rubAumiya rubAumyt kitaeb
four hundred
‫ر ُﺑﻌـُﻤـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ر ُﺑﻌـُﻤﯿﺖ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
chamsumiya chamsamyt kitaeb
five hundred
‫ﺧـَﻤﺴـُﻤـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺧـَﻤﺴـَﻤﯿﺖ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
suttumiya suttumyt kitaeb
six hundred
‫ﺳُـﺘﱡـﻤـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺳُـﺘﱡـﻤﯿﺖ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
subuAmiya subuAamyt kitaeb
seven hundred
‫ﺳـُﺒـُﻌﻤـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺳـُﺒـُﻌـَﻤﯿﺖ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
tumunumiya tumunumyt kitaeb
eight hundred
‫ﺗـُﻤـُﻨـُﻤـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺗـُﻤـُﻨـُﻤﯿﺖ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
tusAumiya tusAumyt kitaeb
nine hundred
‫ﺗـُﺴﻌـُﻤـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺗـُﺴﻌـُﻤﯿﺖ ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
Thousands
Here are the numbers from one to nine thousand. Five thousand should really be chamsaet 'alf ‫ﺧـَﻤﺴﺎ‬
‫َت ألف‬, but it is pronounced as below.
English Egyptian
alf
one thousand
‫ا َﻟﻒ‬
alfyn
two thousand
‫ا َﻟﻔﯿﻦ‬
talat talaef
three thousand
‫ﺗـَﻠـَﺖ ﺗـَﻼ َف‬
'arbaA talaef
four thousand
‫أرﺑـَﻊ ﺗـَﻼ َف‬
chamas talaef
five thousand
‫ﺧـَﻤـَﺲ ﺗـَﻼ َف‬
sit talaef
six thousand
‫ﺳـِﺖ ﺗـَﻼ َف‬
sabaA talaef
seven thousand
‫ﺳـَﺒـَﻊ ﺗـَﻼ َف‬
taman talaef
eight thousand
‫ﺗـَﻤـَﻦ ﺗـَﻼ َف‬
tisaA talaef
nine thousand
‫ﺗـِﺴـَﻊ ﺗـَﻼ َف‬
Aashar talaef
ten thousand
‫ﻋـَﺸـَﺮ ﺗـَﻼ َف‬
Ordinals
To explain the sequence of things (first, second, third), you use the ordinal. It can be either as an
adjective or as a noun in the genitive form: As an adjective, the ordinal be preceded by il ‫ ا ِل‬and, for
1 to 9, must agree with the gender of the noun. From 11 onwards, the cardinal numbers are the
same as ordinals, and are used as adjectives only.
English Egyptian
ilyum ittaelit
the third day
‫ا ِﻟﯿﻮم ا ِﻟﺘﺎ َﻟـِﺖ‬
taelit yum
third day
‫ﺗﺎ َﻟـِﺖ ﯾﻮم‬
ilmarra ittalta
the third time
‫ا ِﻟﻤَـ ّﺮ َة ا ِﻟﺘﺎ َﻟﺘـَﺔ‬
taelit marra
third time
‫ﺗﺎ َﻟـِﺖ ﻣَـ ّﺮ َة‬
ilyum ilAaeshir
PRO version
the tenth day
the tenth day
‫ا ِﻟﯿﻮم ا ِﻟﻌﺎ َﺷـِﺮ‬
Aaeshir yum
tenth day
‫ﻋﺎ َﺷـِﺮ ﯾﻮم‬
ilmarra ilAaeshira
the tenth time
‫ا ِﻟﻤَـ ّﺮ َة ا ِﻟﻌﺎ َﺷـِﺮ َة‬
Aaeshir marra
tenth time
‫ﻋﺎ َﺷـِﺮ ﻣَـ ّﺮ َة‬
ilyum ilhidaeshar
the eleventh day
‫ا ِﻟﯿﻮم ا ِﻟﺤـِﺪا َﺷـَﺮ‬
ilmarra ilhidaeshar
eleventh time
‫ا ِﻟﻤَـ ّﺮ َة ا ِﻟﺤـِﺪا َﺷـَﺮ‬
ilyum ilAasharyn
the twentieth day
‫ا ِﻟﯿﻮم ا ِﻟﻌـَﺸـَﺮﯾﻦ‬
ilmarra ilAasharyn
twentieh time
‫ا ِﻟﻤَـ ّﺮ َة ا ِﻟﻌـَﺸـَﺮﯾﻦ‬
Here are the first ten ordinals:

awwil ilkitaeb il'awwil
first the first book
first the first book
‫ا َ ّو ِل‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻷ ّو ِل‬
'uula il'utta il'uula
the first cat
‫ﻻ‬
َ ‫أ ُو‬ ‫ﻻ‬
َ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ا ِﻷ ُو‬
tany ilkitaeb ittany
second the second book
‫ﺗﺎ َﻧﻲ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺘﺎ َﻧﻲ‬
tanya il'utta ittanya
the second cat
‫ﺗﺎ َﻧﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ا ِﻟﺘﺎ َﻧﯿـَﺔ‬
taelit ilkitaeb ittaelit
third the third book
‫ﺗﺎ َﻟـِﺖ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺘﺎ َﻟـِﺖ‬
talta il'utta ittalta
the third cat
‫ﺗﺎ َﻟﺘـَﺔ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ا ِﻟﺘﺎ َﻟﺘـَﺔ‬
rabAa ilkitaeb irrabAa
fourth the fourth book
‫را َﺑ َﻊ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺮا َﺑ َﻊ‬
rabAa il'utta irrabAa
the fourth cat
‫ر َﺑﻌـَﺔ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ا ِﻟﺮ َﺑﻌـَﺔ‬
chams ilkitaeb ilchaamis
fifth the fifth book
‫ﺧﺎ َﻣﺲ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺨﺎ َﻣـِﺲ‬
chamsa il'utta ilchamsa
the fifth cat
‫ﺧـَﻤﺴـَﺔ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ا ِﻟﺨـَﻤﺴـَﺔ‬
saedis ilkitaeb issaedis
sixth the sixth book
‫ﺳﺎ َد ِس‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َد ِس‬
saetit il'utta issaetit
the sixth cat
‫ﺳﺎ َﺗـِﺔ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َﺗـِﺔ‬
saebiA ilkitaeb issaebiA
seventh the seventh book
‫ﺳﺎ َﺑـِﻊ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َﺑـِﻊ‬
saebiAa il'utta issaebiAa
seventh the seventh cat
‫ﺳﺎ َﺑـِﻌـَﺔ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َﺑـِﻌـَﺔ‬
taemin ilkitaeb ittaemin
eighth the eighth book
‫ﺗﺎ َﻣـِﻦ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺘﺎ َﻣـِﻦ‬
tamna il'utta ittamna
eighth the eighth cat
‫ﺗـَﻤﻨـَﺔ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ا ِﻟﺘـَﻤﻨـَﺔ‬
ilkitaeb ittaesiA
taesiA
ninth ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺘﺎ‬
‫ ﺗﺎ َﺳـِﻊ‬the ninth book
‫َسـِع‬
tasAa il'utta ittaesiAa
ninth the ninth cat
‫ﺗﺎ َﺳﻌـَﺔ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ا ِﻟﺘﺎ َﺳـِﻌـَﺔ‬
Aaeshir ilkitaeb ilAaeshir
tenth the tenth book
‫ﻋﺎ َﺷـِﺮ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﻌﺎ َﺷـِﺮ‬
Aaeshira il'utta ilAaeshira
PRO version tenth
Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API the tenth cat pdfcrowd.com
tenth the tenth cat
‫ﻋﺎ َﺷـِﺮ َة‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻘُـﻄﱠـﺔ ا ِﻟﻌﺎ َﺷـِﺮ َة‬
From the eleventh onwards, the cardinal and ordinal are the same. Here are some examples:
Number Ordinal English Egyptian

hidaeshar ilkitaeb ilhidaeshar
eleven the eleventh book
‫ﺣـِﺪا َﺷـَﺮ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺤـِﺪا َﺷـَﺮ‬
'itnaeshar ilkitaeb il'itnashar
twelve the twelfth book
‫إﺗﻨﺎ َﺷـَﺮ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻹﺗﻨـَﺸـَﺮ‬
talaetashar ilkitaeb ittalaetashar
thirteen the thirteenth book
‫ﺗـَﻼ َﺗـَﺸـَﺮ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺘـَﻼ َﺗـَﺸـَﺮ‬
Aasharyn ilkitaeb ilAasharyn
twenty the twentieth book
‫ﻋـَﺸـَﺮﯾﻦ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﻌـَﺸـَﺮﯾﻦ‬
thalatyn ilkitaeb ittalatyn
thirty the thirtieth book
‫ﺛـَﻠـَﺘﯿﻦ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺘـَﻠـَﺘﯿﻦ‬
'arbaAyn ilkitaeb il'arbaAyn
forty the fortieth book
‫أرﺑـَﻌﯿﻦ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻷرﺑـَﻌﯿﻦ‬
miya ilkitaeb ilmiya
one hundred the hundredth book
‫ﻣـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﻤـِﯿـَﺔ‬
mityn ilkitaeb ilmityn
two hundred the two hundredth book
two hundred the two hundredth book
‫ﻣـِﺘﯿﻦ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﻤـِﺘﯿﻦ‬
tultumiya ilkitaeb ittultumiya
three hundred the three hundredth book
‫ﺗـُﻠﺘـُﻤـِﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻟﺘـُﻠﺘـُﻤـِﯿـَﺔ‬
'alf ilkitaeb il'alf
one thousand the thousandth book
‫أﻟﻒ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ا ِﻷﻟﻒ‬
Fractions
The following fractions are widely used:
English Egyptian
nus
half
‫ﻧﻮص‬
tilt
a third
‫ﺗـِﻠﺖ‬
rubaA
a quarter
‫ر ُﺑـَﻊ‬
talaet 'arbaAa
three quarters
‫ﺗـَﻼ َت أرﺑَـ َﻊ‬
Questions
To ask how many people or things, you should use kam ‫ ﻛـَﻢ‬before the noun. To ask for a
sequence or reference number (what or which, you put the kam ‫ ﻛـَﻢ‬after the noun. In all of these
cases, the noun is singular.
Type English Egyptian

Aandak kam walad?
count How many children do you have?
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ َك ﻛـَﻢ و َﻟـَﺪ؟‬
kam yum hatinizil?
count How many days will you stay?
‫ﻛـَﻢ ﯾﻮم ﻫـَﺘـِﻨـِﺰ ِل؟‬
kam zibun bukrah?
count How many guests tomorrow?
‫ﻛـَﻢ ز ِﺑﻮن ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه؟‬
nimritak kaem?
what What is your telephone number?
‫ﻧـِﻤﺮ ِﺗـَﻚ ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
issaeAa kaem?
what What time is it?
‫ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َﻋـَﺔ ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
il'igtimaeA issaeAa kaem?
what What time is the meeting?
‫ا ِﻹﺟﺘـِﻤﺎ َع ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َﻋـَﺔ ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
sha''ytak raqam kaem?
what What is your apartment number?
‫ﺷَـﻘﱠﯿﺘـﻚ ر َﻗـَﻢ ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
Aaeyiz dur kaem?
which Which floor do you want?
which Which floor do you want?
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ دور ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
Ownership
There are several different ways to indicate ownership and belonging. These are:
Egyptian Meaning Egyptian English

possessive 'ismuh
my/your/his his name
pronoun ‫إﺳﻤـُﻪ‬
simple ism ilwalad
of the name of the boy
genitive ‫ا ِﺳﻢ ا ِﻟﻮ َﻟـَﺪ‬
ilbasbur bitaeAy
bitaeA
‫ ا ِﻟﺒـَﺴﺒﻮر ﺑـِﺘﺎ‬my passport
‫ ﺑـِﺘﺎ َع‬belonging
‫َعي‬
Aand Aandy biyt
ownership I have a house
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي ﺑـِﯿﺖ‬
maAa maAaek kabryt?
have with you Do you have matches (on you)?
‫ﻣَـ َﻊ‬ ‫ﻣـَﻌﺎ َك ﻛـَﺒﺮﯾﺖ؟‬
ly having for a purpose fy busta lyk
intended for
‫ﻟﻲ‬ attached
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻄـَﺔ ﻟﯿﻚ‬there is some post for you
milk ilbiyt dah milkuh
(my/your/his) property that house is his property
‫ﻣـِﻠﻚ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﺒـِﯿﺖ د َه ﻣـِﻠﻜـُﻪ‬
possessive pronoun
In both english and arabic, the most common way of expressing ownership is with a posessive
pronoun (my, your... etc). In egyptian, this is a suffix attached to the noun. Here are some examples:
English Arabic
'ismy
my name
‫إﺳﻤﻲ‬
'ismak
your(m) name
‫إﺳﻤـَﻚ‬
'ismik
your(f) name
‫إﺳﻤـِﻚ‬
biyty
my house
‫ﺑـِﯿﺘﻲ‬
biytuh
his house
‫ﺑـِﯿﺘـُﻪ‬
'abwya
my father
‫أﺑﻮﯾَﺎ‬
'abuha
your(f) father
‫أﺑﻮﻫَﺎ‬
'abuh
his father
‫أﺑﻮه‬
rabbina
our god
‫ر َﺑﱢـﻨَﺎ‬
The posessive pronouns themselves are pretty easy to learn, but when the pronouns are attached
to nouns, the vowels do a little dance to make sure that you don't get three consonants in a row.
See pronouns for more information.
simple genitive
In english, the simple genitive can take two forms: both are expressed in the same way in arabic.
English Egyptian
'ism irraagil
the man's name ‫إﺳﻢ ا ِﻟﺮا‬
‫َجـِل‬
'ism irraagil
the name of the man ‫إﺳﻢ ا ِﻟﺮا‬
‫َجـِل‬
il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬can be attached to the second noun if required, but must never be attached to the first noun. If
the first noun is feminine, the -a ‫ ــَة‬ending changes to -it ‫ــِت‬. Nothing must be placed between the
two nouns. Adjectives go after the second noun, but must agree in gender and number with the first
noun. If a possessive suffix is required, it must go on the second word (or use bitaeA ‫)ﺑـِﺘﺎ َع‬. Here are
some examples:
English Egyptian
'ism ilwalad Garyb
the boy's name is strange
‫إﺳﻢ ا ِﻟﻮ َﻟـَﺪ ﻏـَﺮﯾﺐ‬
Aandy nimrit tilyfunha
I have her telephone number
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي ﻧـِﻤﺮ ِة ﺗـِﻠﯿﻔﻮﻧﻬَﺎ‬
mahatit il'atr fyn?
Where is the railway station?
‫ﻣـَﺤـَﻄـِﺔ ا ِﻟﻘـَﻄﺮ ﻓﯿﻦ؟‬
'inta Aaarif 'ibn Aammy?
Do you know my cousin? (uncle's son)
‫إﻧﺖ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِف إﺑﻦ ﻋَـﻤّﻲ؟‬
tiAarif 'ibn Aammy?
Do you know my cousin? (uncle's son)
‫ﺗـِﻌـَﺮ ِف إﺑﻦ ﻋَـﻤّﻲ؟‬
'inta shuft Aarabiyit ilmudyr ilgidyda?
Have you seen the boss's new car?
‫إﻧﺖ َ ﺷﻮﻓﺖ ﻋـَﺮ َﺑـِﯿـِﺔ ا ِﻟﻤـُﺪﯾﺮ ا ِﻟﺠـِﺪﯾﺪ َة؟‬
'inta shuft ilAarabiya 'illy maAa ilmudyr ilgidyd?
Have you seen the new boss's car? ‫إﻧﺖ َ ﺷﻮﻓﺖ ا ِﻟﻌـَﺮ َﺑـِﯿـَﺔ إﻟّﻲ ﻣـَﻊ َ ا ِﻟﻤـُﺪﯾﺮ ا‬
‫ِلجـِديد؟‬
Aaeyiz 'izzaezit mayaeh
I want a bottle of water
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ إزّا َز ِة ﻣـَﯿﺎ َه‬
iddyny 'izzaezit ilmayaeh
give me this bottle of water ‫ا ِدّﯾﻨﻲ إزّا َز ِة ا ِﻟﻤـَﯿﺎ َه‬
dyh
Belonging- bitaA ‫ﺑـِﺘـَﻊ‬
bitaA ‫ ﺑـِﺘـَﻊ‬is used in several ways:
noun + bitaA + possessive suffix, to indicate ownership

noun + bitaA + possessive suffix, as an alternative to a genitive
bitaA + product (milk, onions, tyres etc), to indicate somebody who sells the product
bitaA + possessive suffix, to refer to a man's or woman's private parts
bitaA ‫ ﺑـِﺘـَﻊ‬is always used for ownership when the noun ends in -yn ‫ ـﯿﻦ‬and for imported words (my
villa). It is not used for parts of the body (my leg).
English Egyptian
'ana daayAt ilbasbur bitaAy
I have lost my passport
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﺿﺎ َﯾﻌﺖ ا ِﻟﺒـَﺴﺒﻮر ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﻲ‬
Aandak kam 'uuda fy ilvyla bitaAtak?
how many rooms does your villa have? ‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ َك ﻛـَﻢ أ ُوﺿـَﺔ ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟڤﯿﻼ َ ﺑـِﺘﺎ‬
‫َعتـَك؟‬
fyn ilmudarrisyn bitwaAak?
Where are your teachers?
‫ﻓﯿﻦ ا ِﻟﻤـُﺪ َ ّر ِﺳﯿﻦ ﺑـِﺘﻮ َﻋـَﻚ؟‬
huwwa bitaeA chudaar
He is a vegetable seller
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺑـِﺘﺎ َع ﺧـُﻀﺎ َر‬
He is a milk seller huwwa bitaeA laban
means he's a ladies' man ‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺑـِﺘﺎ َع ﻟـَﺒـَﻦ‬
battal tuhrush fy bitaeAak
Stop scratching yourself!
‫ﺑَـﻄﱠـﻞ ﺗـُﻬﺮ ُش ﻓﻲ ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋـَﻚ‬
bitaeA ‫ ﺑـِﺘﺎ َع‬is like a participle, so it has to agree in gender and number with the noun. Here are all of
the possible endings:
English m f pl
the book the bag the books
ilkitaeb bitaeA- ishshanta bitaAt- ilkutub bituA-
‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋـ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﺸـَﻨﻄـَﺔ ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﺘـ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻜـُﺘﻮب ﺑـِﺘﻮﻋـ‬
bitaAy bitaAty bituAy
belonging to me
‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﻮﻋﻲ‬
bitaAna bitaeAitna bituAna pdfcrowd.com
bitaAna bitaeAitna bituAna
belonging to us
‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋـِﺘﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﻮﻋﻨَﺎ‬
bitaeAak bitaAtak bituAak
belonging to you(m)
‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋـَﻚ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﺘـَﻚ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﻮﻋـَﻚ‬
bitaeAik bitaAtik bituAik
belonging to you(f)
‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋـِﻚ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﺘـِﻚ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﻮﻋـِﻚ‬
bitaAkum bitaeAitkum bituAkum
belonging to you(pl)
‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﻜـُﻢ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋـِﺘﻜـُﻢ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﻮﻋﻜـُﻢ‬
bitaeAuh bitaAtuh bituAuh
belonging to him
‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋـُﻪ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﺘـُﻪ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﻮﻋـُﻪ‬
bitaAha bitaeAitha bituAha
belonging to her
‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﻬَﺎ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋـِﺘﻬَﺎ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﻮﻋﻬَﺎ‬
bitaAhum bitaeAithum bituAhum
belonging to them
‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋﻬـُﻢ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﺎ َﻋـِﺘﻬـُﻢ‬ ‫ﺑـِﺘﻮﻋﻬـُﻢ‬
Ownership - Aand ‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ‬
Aand ‫ ﻋـَﻨﺪ‬means that you own something but don't necessarily have with you. It can also be used
about members of your family. An object pronoun can be added to indicate who owns something.
English Egyptian
Aandy Aarabiya
I have a car
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي ﻋـَﺮ َﺑـِﯿـَﺔ‬
Aanduh waladyn
he has two children
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ ُه و َﻟـَﺪﯾﻦ‬
Aandak kutub?
do you have any books?
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ َك ﻛـُﺘـُﺐ؟‬
Here are all of the possible forms.
English Arabic
Aandy
I have
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي‬
Aandina
we have
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ ِﻧَﺎ‬
Aandak
you(m) have
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ َك‬
Aandik
you(f) have
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ ِك‬
Aandukum
you(pl) have
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ ُﻛـُﻢ‬
Aanduh pdfcrowd.com
Aanduh
he has
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ ُه‬
Aandaha
she has
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ َﻫَﺎ‬
Aanduhum
they have
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ ُﻫـُﻢ‬
Having with you maAa ‫ﻣَـ َﻊ‬

maAa means that you have something or somebody with you. It takes an object suffix to say who it
is with.
English Egyptian
maAak ilmafatyh?
Do you have the keys?
‫ﻣـَﻌـَﻚ ا ِﻟﻤـَﻔﺎ َﺗﯿﺢ؟‬
'ana haaruh maAaak
I will go with you
‫أﻧﺎ َ ﻫﺎ َروح ﻣـَﻌَــَﻚ‬
maAak fakka?
Do you have any change?
‫ﻣـَﻌـَﻚ ﻓَـﻜﱠـﺔ؟‬
Here are all of the possible forms:
English Egyptian
maAaeya
I have
‫ﻣـَﻌﺎ َﯾَﺎ‬
maAana
we have
‫ﻣـَﻌﺎ َﻧَﺎ‬
maAaek
you(m) have
‫ﻣـَﻌﺎ َك‬
maAaky
you(f) have
‫ﻣـَﻌﺎ َﻛﻲ‬
maAaekum
you(pl) have
‫ﻣـَﻌﺎ َﻛـُﻢ‬
maAaeh
he has
‫ﻣـَﻌﺎ َه‬
maAaha
she has
‫ﻣـَﻌﺎ َﻫَﺎ‬
maAaehum
they have
‫ﻣـَﻌﺎ َﻫـُﻢ‬
intended for - ly- ‫ﻟﯿـ‬
ly ‫ ﻟﻲ‬can be used for parts of the body, members of your family, for something that is attached, and
for something that is intended for somebody or something. It is also used when an inanimate object
has something. Here are some examples:
English Egyptian
lyh rigl wahda bas
he has only one leg
‫ﻟﯿﻪ ر ِﺟﻞ وا َﺣﺪ َة ﺑـَﺲ‬
lyha waladyn
she has two children
‫ﻟﯿﻬﺎ َ و َﻟـَﺪﯾﻦ‬
fy busta lyky
there is mail for you (f)
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻄـَﺔ ﻟﯿﻜﻲ‬
I owe you five pounds Aandy chamsa giny lyk
Lit: I have five founds for you(m) ‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي ﺧـَﻤﺴـَﺔ ﺟـِﻨﯿﺔ ﻟﯿﻚ‬
ilhidaya dy lykum
this present is for (all of) you(pl)
‫ا ِﻟﻬـِﺪ َﯾـَﺔ دي ﻟﯿﻜـُﻢ‬
I want a garden seat Aaeyiz kursy lilginiyna
A seat intended for the garden ‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ ﻛـُﺮﺳﻲ ﻟـِﻠﺠـِﻨـِﯿﻨـَﺔ‬
ishsha''a lyha garaaj
the flat has a garage
‫ا ِﻟﺸَـﻘﱠـﺔ ﻟﯿﻬﺎ َ ﺟـَﺮا َچ‬
the flat has two bedrooms ishsha''a fyhae'uudtyn
use fy ‫ ﻓﻲ‬because rooms are inside ‫ا ِﻟﺸَـﻘﱠـﺔ ﻓﯿﻬﺎ َأ ُوﺿﺘﯿﻦ‬
Here are all of the possible forms:
English m
liya
I have
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻟِـ‬
lyna
we have
‫ﻟﯿﻨَﺎ‬
lyk
you(m) have
‫ﻟﯿﻚ‬
lyky
you(f) have
‫ﻟﯿﻜﻲ‬
lykum
you(pl) have
‫ﻟﯿﻜـُﻢ‬
lyh
he has
‫ﻟﯿﻪ‬
lyha
she has
‫ﻟﯿﻬَﺎ‬
lyhum
they have
‫ﻟﯿﻬـُﻢ‬
Possession property milk ‫ﻣـِﻠﻚ‬
Ownership of real estate - houses, land etc, can be expressed with milk- ‫ ﻣـِﻠﻜـ‬plus a suffix.
English Egyptian
Aanduh biyt milkuh
He has his own house
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ ُه ﺑـِﯿﺖ ﻣـِﻠﻜـُﻪ‬
Aandy 'ard milk fy ilGarda'a
I own land in Hurghada ‫ﻋـَﻨﺪي أرض ﻣـِﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟﻐـَﺮد‬
‫َقـَة‬
Quantities
You can specify a quantity in several ways:
measures - metres, kilos etc

numbers
containers - packs, bottles etc
approximate amounts - a little, a lot etc
Measures
For weights, lengths and other measurements, you use a number followed by a singular noun.
'ahmad tuluh mitr 1 wa 90 santy

'ahmad tuluh mitr 1 wa 90 santy
Ahmed is 1m90 tall
‫ ﺳـَﻨﺘﻲ‬٩٠ َ ‫ و‬١ ‫أﺣﻤـَﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻮه ﻣـِﺘﺮ‬
ishshanta dih bi Aishryn ginyh
this bag is 20 pounds
‫ا ِﻟﺸـَﻨﻄـَﺔ د ِه ب ِ ﻋـِﺸﺮﯾﻦ ﺟـِﻨﯿﻪ‬
'itnyn kylw bataatis, law samaht
2 kilos of potatoes, please
‫ ﻟـَﻮ ﺳـَﻤـَﺤﺖ‬،‫إﺗﻨﯿﻦ ﻛﯿﻠﻮ ﺑـَﻄﺎ َﻃـِﺲ‬
Aaeyiz myt garam salamy
I want a hundred grams of salami
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ ﻣﯿﺖ ﺟـَﺮ َم ﺳـَﻼ َﻣﻲ‬
mihtaeg rubaA kylw zibda
I need a quarter kilo of butter
‫ﻣـِﺤﺘﺎ َج ر ُﺑـَﻊ ﻛﯿﻠﻮ ز ِﺑﺪ َة‬
ilAarabiya gaebit tamanya tun mayae
the truck brought eight tonnes of water ‫ا ِﻟﻌـَﺮ َﺑـِﯿـَﺔ ﺟﺎ َﺑـِﺖ ﺗـَﻤﺎ َﻧﯿـَﺔ ﻃـُﻦ ﻣـَﯿﺎ‬
‫َة‬
Numbers
See the section in numbers for more information about this.
Containers
If you want something in a container of some sort: carton, bottle, etc, you use the genitive of the
container. The main effect of this is that words ending in tee-marbuta -a ‫ ــَة‬are pronounced -it ‫ــِت‬.
laezim tachuz maAla'it dawaa'
you must take one spoonful of medicine
‫ﻻ َز ِم ﺗـَﺨـُﺬ ﻣـَﻌﻠـَﻘـِﺔ د َوا َء‬
Aaeyiz Aalbit sagaeyar
I want a pack of cigarettes
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ ﻋـَﻠﺒـِﺔ ﺳـَﺠﺎ َﯾـَﺮ‬
'izzaezit maeya, law samaht
a bottle of water, please
‫ ﻟـَﻮ ﺳـَﻤـَﺤﺖ‬،‫إزّا َز ِة ﻣﺎ َﯾـَﺔ‬
Approximate measures
shaey myn Gyr sukkar

tea without sugar
‫ﺷﺎ َي ﻣﯿﻦ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺳُـﻜﱠـﺮ‬
normal tea shaey mazbut
(with three sugar) ‫ﺷﺎ َي ﻣـَﺰﺑﻮط‬
shaey chafyf
weak tea
‫ﺷﺎ َي ﺧـَﻔﯿﻒ‬
shaey ti'yl
strong tea
‫ﺷﺎ َي ﺗـِﻘﯿﻞ‬
shuwayit laban
a little milk
‫ﺷـُﻮ َﯾـِﺔ ﻟـَﺒـَﻦ‬
maAandysh filus kifaeya
I don't have enough money
I don't have enough money
‫ﻣـَﻌـَﻨﺪﯾﺶ ﻓـِﻠﻮس ﻛـِﻔﺎ َﯾـَﺔ‬
Aanduh filus kityr
he has a lot of money
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ ُه ﻓـِﻠﻮس ﻛـِﺘﯿﺮ‬
you have a lot of friends Aandak 'ashaeb yama
informal ‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ َك أﺻﺤﺎ َب ﯾﺎ َﻣَﺎ‬
Questions
There are four main groups of questions.
Direct- what, when, why

Indirect- courteous question and whether
Confirmation - isn't it so?
Rhetorical- you are making a point and don't expect an answer
English quirks
In english, it is possible to ask a question in many different ways. some of these translate easily into
Egyptian: others require a little thought. The ones you need to watch out for are:
sentences with 'do' where you are not doing anything

sentences with 'got' where you are not getting anything
sentences with how followed by an adverb or adjective (see adverbal question)
For all english verbs except is and have, you can turn a statement into a question by putting do in
front of it.
you know John

do you know John?
.
In egyptian, you can either add huwwa ‫ ﻫُـ ﱠﻮ‬at the start of the sentence or use inflection you know
john?
The word have is somewhat overused in english, and English speakers often reduce the risk of
confusion by saying have you got rather than the older form, still used by most americans, do you
have...?. There is no equivalent in egyptian, so inflection is used
Direct questions
It is possible to frame a direct question in several ways:
using a query word at the end of the sentence

preceding a sentence with huwwa ‫ﻫُـ ﱠﻮ‬
by inflection
Query words
In english, a query word normally start the sentence: in egyptian it is normally at the end of the
sentence. For example
where are you going?

raayiH fyn?
The following query words can be used:
English Egyptian
'iyh
what
‫إﯾﻪ‬
'imta
when
‫إﻣﺘﻰ‬
fyn
where
‫ﻓﯿﻦ‬
minyn
where from
‫ﻣـِﻨﯿﻦ‬
'izzay
how
‫إ ّز َي‬
'anhw
which
‫أﻧﻬﻮ‬
kaem
how many ‫ﻛﺎ َم‬
followed by singular noun
kaem
kaem
what (number)
‫ﻛﺎ َم‬
'add iyh
how much (of something)
‫ﻗَـ ّﺪ ا ِﯾﻪ‬
bikaem
how much (money)
‫ﺑـِﻜﺎ َم‬
lyh
why
‫ﻟﯿﻪ‬
The simple imperfect ('aAamil, tiAuz, yiruh ‫ ﯾـِﺮوه‬،‫ ﺗـِﻌﻮز‬،‫ أﻋـَﻤـِﻞ‬is often used in questions. Here are some
examples:
English Egyptian
'izzayak?
how are you?
‫إ ّز َﯾـَﻚ؟‬
how are you? 'aAamil 'iyh?
lit. what are you doing? ‫أﻋـَﻤـِﻞ إﯾﻪ؟‬
bitaAamil 'iyh?
what are you doing?
‫ﺑـِﺘـَﻌـَﻤـِﻞ إﯾﻪ؟‬
'ashufak 'imta?
'ashufak 'imta?
when will I see you?
‫أﺷﻮﻓـَﻚ إﻣﺘﻰ؟‬
ilmahatta fyn?
where is the station?
‫ا ِﻟﻤـَﺤَـﻄﱠـﺔ ﻓﯿﻦ؟‬
mumkin 'ashtiry ward min fyn?
where can I buy flowers from?
‫ﻣـُﻤﻜـِﻦ أﺷﺘـِﺮي و َرد ﻣـِﻦ ﻓﯿﻦ؟‬
minyn mumkin 'ashtiry ward?
where can I buy flowers from?
‫ﻣـِﻨﯿﻦ ﻣـُﻤﻜـِﻦ أﺷﺘـِﺮي و َرد؟‬
'inta minyn?
where are you from?
‫إﻧﺖ َ ﻣـِﻨﯿﻦ؟‬
'ashhan ittilyfun dah 'izzay?
how do I charge this phone?
‫أﺷﺤـَﻦ ا ِﻟﺘـِﻠﯿﻔﻮن د َه إ ّز َي؟‬
Aaewiz ilkitaeb 'anhw?
which book (m) do you(m) want?
‫ﻋﺎ َو ِز ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب أﻧﻬﻮ؟‬
'anhw ilkubaeya bitaAitak?
which glass (f) is yours(m)?
‫أﻧﻬﻮ ا ِﻟﻜـُﺒﺎ َﯾـَﺔ ﺑـِﺘـَﻌـِﺘـَﻚ؟‬
Aaewiz laban 'add iyh?
how much milk would you like?
‫ﻋﺎ َو ِز ﻟـَﺒـَﻦ ﻗَـ ّﺪ ا ِﯾﻪ؟‬
ishshanta dy bikaem?
how much is this bag?
‫ا ِﻟﺸـَﻨﻄـَﺔ دي ﺑـِﻜﺎ َم؟‬
huwwa raayih lyh?
why is he going?
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ را َﯾـِﺢ ﻟﯿﻪ؟‬
Here are some common answers to questions
English Egyptian
'add iyh? 'add kidah
How much? This much
‫ﻗَـ ّﺪ ا ِﯾﻪ؟ ﻗَـ ّﺪ ﻛـِﺪ َه‬
lyh? Aalashaen
Why? Because.
‫ﻟﯿﻪ؟ ﻋـَﻠـَﺸﺎ َن‬
lyh? kidah
Why? It's like that
‫ﻟﯿﻪ؟ ﻛـِﺪ َه‬
lyh? 'ahsan kidah
Why? Better like this
‫ﻟﯿﻪ؟ أﺣﺴـَﻦ ﻛـِﺪ َه‬
lyh? lyh laa'?
Why? Why not?
‫ﻟﯿﻪ؟ ﻟﯿﻪ ﻻ َء؟‬
To ask how many people or things, you should use kaem ‫ ﻛﺎ َم‬before the noun. To ask for a
sequence or reference number (what or which, you put the kaem ‫ ﻛﺎ َم‬after the noun. In all of these
cases, the noun is singular.
English Egyptian
Aandak kaem walad?
How many children do you have?
‫ﻋـَﻨﺪ َك ﻛﺎ َم و َﻟـَﺪ؟‬
hatinizil kaem yum?
How many days will you stay?
‫ﻫـَﺘـِﻨـِﺰ ِل ﻛﺎ َم ﯾﻮم؟‬
kaem zibun bukrah?
How many guests tomorrow?
‫ﻛﺎ َم ز ِﺑﻮن ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه؟‬
nimritak kaem?
What is your telephone number?
‫ﻧـِﻤﺮ ِﺗـَﻚ ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
issaeAa kaem?
What time is it?
‫ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َﻋـَﺔ ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
il'igtimaeA issaeAa kaem?
What time is the meeting?
‫ا ِﻹﺟﺘـِﻤﺎ َع ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َﻋـَﺔ ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
sha''itak ra'am kaem?
What is your apartment number?
‫ﺷَـﻘﱢـﺘـَﻚ ر َﻗـَﻢ ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
sha''itak 'anhw?
Which is your apartment?
‫ﺷَـﻘﱢـﺘـَﻚ أﻧﻬﻮ؟‬
Aaeyiz dur kaem?
Aaeyiz dur kaem?
Which floor do you want?
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ دور ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
Pronoun questions
In english, it is possible to make a question by swapping the subject and verb. For example,
he is english
is he english?
The equivalent in Egyptian arabic is to put the query pronoun huwwa ‫ ﻫُـ ﱠﻮ‬at the start of the
sentence. You should think of this as "Is it so that..."
huwwa iicnta gaay maAa-naa?

Is it so that you are coming with us?
Inflection
In english, you can make a statement by saying she is coming. or turn it into a question, she is
coming? just by the tone of your voice: the pitch rises a little at the end of the sentence to indicate
a question. You can do exactly the same thing in Arabic. hiya gayya ‫ ﻫـِﻲ َ ﺟـَﯿﯿـَﺔ‬is a statement nd hiya
gayya? ‫ ﻫـِﻲ َ ﺟـَﯿﯿـَﺔ؟‬is a question.
Indirect questions (whether)
An indirect question is made up of two clauses: the first clause is often a courtesy clause "Could
you possibly..." and the second clause is the real question. Here are some examples of direct and
indirect questions.
Direct Indirect
where is the station? Can you tell me where the station is?
what is the time? Do you know what the time is?
is he coming? Do you know whether he is coming?
The query-word whether is used only in indirect questions: in egyptian, 'iza ‫ إذَا‬is used for this.
English Egyptian
mumkin ti'uly fyn ilmahatta?
Can you tell me where the station is?
‫ﻣـُﻤﻜـِﻦ ﺗـِﻘـُﻠﻲ ﻓﯿﻦ ا ِﻟﻤـَﺤَـﻄﱠـﺔ؟‬
'inta Aaarif issaeAa kaem?
Do you know what the time is?
‫إﻧﺖ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِف ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َﻋـَﺔ ﻛﺎ َم؟‬
'inta Aaarif 'iza huwwa gayy?
Do you know whether he is coming?
‫إﻧﺖ َ ﻋﺎ َر ِف إذا َ ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺟـَﯿﻲ؟‬
Confirmation questions
If you are pretty sure about something but want to check, you can use one of the following methods:
English Arabic
huwwa mish gaey?
he's coming, isn't he?
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﻣـِﺶ ﺟﺎ َي؟‬
huwwa gaey, mish kidah?
he's coming, isn't that so?
‫ ﻣـِﺶ ﻛـِﺪ َه؟‬،‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺟﺎ َي‬
huwwa gaey, sahh?
he's coming, right?
‫ ﺻَـﺢّ؟‬،‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ﺟﺎ َي‬
Rhetorical questions
A rhetorical question is used to make a point: you don't expect an answer. Any of the above
methods can be used to ask rhetorical questions.
English Arabic
mish tiskut 'ahsan?
wouldn't it be better if you(m) shut up?
‫ﻣـِﺶ ﺗـِﺴﻜـُﺖ أﺣﺴـَﻦ؟‬
bithazzar, mish kidah?
you(m) must be kidding!
‫ ﻣـِﺶ ﻛـِﺪ َه؟‬،‫ﺑـِﺘﻬَـ ّﺰ َر‬
'inta 'ahbal, sahh?
you(m) are an idiot, right?
‫ ﺻَـﺢّ؟‬،‫إﻧﺖ َ أﻫﺒـَﻞ‬
Adverbal and adjectival questions
In english, it is possible to ask a question using how followed by an adjective or adverb. There is
no similar construction in Egyptian, so it is necessary to re-phrase the question, usually so that you
are asking for a number. Here are some examples:
English re-phrased Egyptian

how many kilometers an kaem kylumitr fy issaeAa
How fast were you driving?
hour.. ‫ﻛﺎ َم ﻛﯿﻠﻮﻣـِﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟﺴﺎ َﻋـَﺔ‬
How often do you go to the kaem marra fy il'usbwaA...
how many times a week...
gym? ٫٫٫‫ﻛﺎ َم ﻣَـ ّﺮ َة ﻓﻲ ا ِﻷ ُﺳﺒﻮ َع‬
ilharraara kaem
How hot is the oven? what is the temperature?
‫ا ِﻟﺤَـﺮّا َر َة ﻛﺎ َم‬
huwwa il'imtihaen kaen
How difficult was the exam? was the exam difficult saAb?
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ ا ِﻹﻣﺘـِﺤﺎ َن ﻛﺎ َن ﺻـَﻌﺐ؟‬
Time
Time can be expressed in several different ways:
units of time - days, weeks etc

parts of the day - morning/afternoon
time of day - 6.30
relative time (before/after) - today/yesterday etc
days of the week
dates
Units of time
English Egyptian Plural

lahza lahzaet
moment
‫ﻟـَﺤﻈـَﺔ‬ ‫ﻟـَﺤﻈﺎ َت‬
thanya thawany
second
‫ﺛﺎ َﻧﯿـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺛـَﻮا َﻧﻲ‬
di'y'a da'aeyi'
minute
‫د ِﻗﯿﻘـَﺔ‬ ‫د َﻗﺎ َﯾـِﻖ‬
saeAa saAaet
hour
‫ﺳﺎ َﻋـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺎ َﻋﺎ َت‬
yum 'ayaem
day
‫ﯾﻮم‬ ‫أﯾﺎ َم‬
'usbuA 'asaebiyA
week
‫أ ُﺳﺒﻮع‬ ‫أﺳﺎ َﺑـِﯿﻊ‬
shahr shuhur
month
month
‫ﺷـَﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺷـُﻬﻮر‬
sana sinyn
year
‫ﺳـَﻨـَﺔ‬ ‫ﺳـِﻨﯿﻦ‬
Aumr 'aAmaar
lifetime
‫ﻋـُﻤﺮ‬ ‫أﻋﻤﺎ َر‬
Parts of the day
The main events in the day are sunrise and sunset. Midnight, noon and the six prayer times can
also be used to specify an approximate time.
English Arabic
illyl
last prayers till dawn
‫ا ِﻟّﯿﻞ‬
issubh
dawn until sunset
‫ا ِﻟﺼـُﺒﺢ‬
masaa'
after sunset
‫ﻣـَﺴﺎ َء‬
fagr
dawn
‫ﻓـَﺠﺮ‬
idduhr
idduhr
noon
‫ا ِﻟﻀـُﻬﺮ‬
baAd idduhr
after noon
‫ﺑـَﻌﺪ ا ِﻟﻀـُﻬﺮ‬
ilmaGrib
sunset
‫ا ِﻟﻤـَﻐﺮ ِب‬
nus illyl
midnight
‫ﻧـُﺺ ا ِﻟّﯿﻞ‬
Time of day
In English, it is normal to use half and quarter hours to describe time. In addition, in Egyptian, thirds
are used. Here is a list of the words that can be used:
English Arabic
nus
half
‫ﻧـُﺺ‬
tilt
a third
‫ﺗـِﻠﺖ‬
rubA
a quarter
‫ر ُﺑﻊ‬
wa
and
‫َو‬
'ila
less
‫ﻻ‬
َ‫إ‬
Here are all the times at five minute intervals:
English Arabic
sabAa
seven o'clock
‫ﺳـَﺒﻌـَﺔ‬
sabAa wa chamsa
five past seven past
‫ﺳـَﺒﻌـَﺔ و َ ﺧـَﻤﺴـَﺔ‬
sabAa wa Aashara
ten past seven
‫ﺳـَﺒﻌـَﺔ و َ ﻋـَﺸـَﺮ َة‬
sabAa wa rubA
quarter past seven
‫ﺳـَﺒﻌـَﺔ و َ ر ُﺑﻊ‬
sabAa wa tilt
twenty past seven
‫ﺳـَﺒﻌـَﺔ و َ ﺗـِﻠﺖ‬
sabAa wa nus 'ila chamsa
twenty five past seven
‫ﺳـَﺒﻌـَﺔ و َ ﻧـُﺺ إﻻ َ ﺧـَﻤﺴـَﺔ‬
sabAa wa nus
half past seven
‫ﺳـَﺒﻌـَﺔ و َ ﻧـُﺺ‬
sabAa wa nus wa chamsa
twenty-five to eight
‫ﺳـَﺒﻌـَﺔ و َ ﻧـُﺺ و َ ﺧـَﻤﺴـَﺔ‬
tamanya 'ila tilt
twenty to eight
‫ﺗـَﻤﺎ َﻧﯿـَﺔ إﻻ َ ﺗـِﻠﺖ‬
quarter to eight tamaanyao iiclaa rubaA
tamanya 'ila Aashara
ten to eight
‫ﺗـَﻤﺎ َﻧﯿـَﺔ إﻻ َ ﻋـَﺸـَﺮ َة‬
tamanya 'ila chamsa
five to eight
‫ﺗـَﻤﺎ َﻧﯿـَﺔ إﻻ َ ﺧـَﻤﺴـَﺔ‬
Relative time
English Arabic
'awil 'imbaarih
the day before yesterday
‫أو ِل إﻣﺒﺎ َر ِح‬
'imbaarih
yesterday
‫إﻣﺒﺎ َر ِح‬
innahaarda
today
today
‫ا ِﻟﻨـَﻬﺎ َرد َة‬
bukrah
tomorrow
‫ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه‬
baAd bukrah
the day after tomorrow
‫ﺑـَﻌﺪ ﺑـُﻜﺮ َه‬
English Arabic
iluusbwaA 'ily faet
last week
‫ا ِﻻ ُﺳﺒﻮ َع إﻟﻲ ﻓﺎ َت‬
iluusbwaA dih
this week
‫ا ِﻻ ُﺳﺒﻮ َع د ِه‬
iluusbwaA 'ily gaey
next week
‫ا ِﻻ ُﺳﺒﻮ َع إﻟﻲ ﺟﺎ َي‬
English Arabic
dilwa'ty
now
‫د ِﻟﻮ َﻗﺘﻲ‬
soon baAd shuwayao
baAdyn
later
‫ﺑـَﻌﺪﯾﻦ‬
lissah
not yet
‫ﻟِـﺴﱠـﻪ‬
badry
early
‫ﺑـَﺪري‬
wachry
late (at night)
‫و َﺧﺮي‬
Days of week
English Arabic
yum ilaahad
Sunday
‫ﯾﻮم ا ِﻻ َ َﺣـَﺪ‬
yum il'ithnyn
Monday
‫ﯾﻮم ا ِﻹﺛﻨﯿﻦ‬
yum ittalaet
Tuesday
‫ﯾﻮم ا ِﻟﺘـَﻼ َت‬
yum il'arbaAa
Wednesday
‫ﯾﻮم ا ِﻷرﺑَـ َﻊ‬
yum ilchamys
Thursday
‫ﯾﻮم ا ِﻟﺨـَﻤﯿﺲ‬
yum ilgumaAa
Friday
‫ﯾﻮم ا ِﻟﺠـُﻤـَﻌـَﺔ‬
yum issabt
Saturday
‫ﯾﻮم ا ِﻟﺴـَﺒﺖ‬
Dates
Which one?
This section explains how to specify which of several things we are interested in, or talking about.
Definite article
To talk about a particular man, we say 'the man' in english. In arabic, we attach il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬to the front of
the noun.
the man is reading his book

iil-raagil biyiqraac kitaab-uh
Note that adding il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬to a word affects the pronunciation if it begins with a sun letter.
Indefinite article
If we don't want to refer to any man in particular, we say 'a man' in english. There is no equivalent of
a in arabic, you just use the noun on its own.
I want a dog
aacnaa Aaayiz kalb
If you want to make it clear that you are talking about just one, you can use the word waaHid- one.
When used for emphasis like this, you place it after the noun.
I want (just) one dog
aacnaa Aaayiz kalb waaHid
You also use it with nationalities to indicate that you are talking about a person, rather than (for
example) the language.
an English man (or woman)

waaHid iingilyzy
waaHdao iingilyziyao
Adjectives
In both English an Egyptian, you can use an adjective to specify which one you are interested in:
you simply put the - il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬in front of the adjective. Note that, in Egyptian, the noun still retains its il-
‫ ا ِﻟـ‬prefix.
English Egyptian
Aaeyiz kura hamra
describe I want a red ball
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ ﻛﻮر َة ﺣـَﻤﺮ َة‬
Aaeyiz ilkura ilhamra
specify I want the red ball
‫ﻋﺎ َﯾـِﺰ ا ِﻟﻜﻮر َة ا ِﻟﺤـَﻤﺮ َة‬
'araa't ilkitab ilkibyr
specify I have read the big book ‫ﻗـَﺮا َءت ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘـَﺐ ا‬
‫ِلكـِبير‬
Demonstrative adjectives
One particular type of adjective is a demonstrative adjective. These are almost the same as the
demonstrative pronouns.
this man
iil-raagil dah
The demonstrative adjectives are:
English Arabic
irraagil dah
this (man)
‫ا ِﻟﺮا َﺟـِﻞ د َه‬
ilkitaeb dah
ilkitaeb dah
this (thing, m)
‫ا ِﻟﻜـِﺘﺎ َب د َه‬
ilhaga dah
this (thing, f)
‫ا ِﻟﻬـَﺠـَﺔ د َه‬
issitt dy
this (woman)
‫ﺖ دي‬
irragala dul
these (men)
‫ا ِﻟﺮ َﺟﺎ َﻻ َ دول‬
irragala dy
these (men) nearer
‫ا ِﻟﺮ َﺟﺎ َﻻ َ دي‬
issittaet dul
these (women)
‫ا ِﻟﺴِـﺘّﺎ َت دول‬
ilkutub dy
these (things,m)
‫ا ِﻟﻜـُﺘﻮب دي‬
ilhagaet dy
these (things,f)
‫ا ِﻟﻬـَﺠﺎ َت دي‬
'ahw
over there (m)
‫أﻫﻮ‬
'ahy
over there [f]
‫أﻫﻲ‬
'ahum
over there (pl)
‫أﻫﻮم‬
Comparatives
You can use a comparative in the same was as an adjective to specify which one you mean:
English Egyptian
muhammad 'atwal taalib
mohammed is the tallest student
‫ﻣـُﺤَـﻤﱠـﺪ أﻃﻮ َل ﻃﺎ َﻟـِﺐ‬
huwwa 'asGar walad
he is the youngest boy
‫ﻫُـ ّﻮ َ أﺻﻐـَﺮ و َﻟـَﺪ‬
ittaalib il'atwal tuluh mitr 1 wa 90 santy
the tallest student is 1m90 ٩٠ َ ‫ و‬١ ‫ا ِﻟﻄﺎ َﻟـِﺐ ا ِﻷﻃﻮ َل ﻃﻮﻟﻮه ﻣـِﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺳـَﻨﺘﻲ‬
ilmashrab il'aGla 20 ginyh
the most expensive drink is 20 pounds
‫ ﺟـِﻨﯿﻪ‬٢٠ ‫ا ِﻟﻤـَﺸﺮ َب ا ِﻷﻏﻠﻰ‬
dih 'ahla fustaen fy ilmahal
this is the prettiest dress in the shop
‫د ِه أﺣﻠﻰ ﻓـُﺴﺘﺎ َن ﻓﻲ ا ِﻟﻤـَﺤـَﻞ‬
kaen 'ahsan yum fy hayaty
it was the best day in my life
‫ﻛﺎ َن أﺣﺴـَﻦ ﯾﻮم ﻓﻲ ﺣـَﯿﺎ َﺗﻲ‬
Arabic Writing and pronunciation
This chapter describes the arabic alphabet, and how it can be written using roman letters, then
goes on to explain the general pronunciation rules of the language.
Please remember that Egyptian Arabic is an oral language. When people are asked to write it, some
write in Modern Standard Arabic and then pronounce it the Egyptian way, others write it as an
Egyptian would say it. As a result, there may some variation in the way things are spelt.
Arabic script
There are 28 basic letters in Egyptian arabic, and about a dozen modifiers.
Writing goes from right to left, and the majority of arabic letters join onto the following letter and so
there are therefore four forms of each letter: solitary, initial, middle and final. For the six letters that
do not join, there are just two forms- solitary and final.
position normal letter non-joining letter

solitary ‫ج‬ ‫د‬
initial ‫ﺟـ‬
middle ‫ـﺠـ‬
final ‫ـﺞ‬ ‫ـﺪ‬
The three short vowels a , i and u and shadda , which doubles the length of a consonant, are
collectively called tashkyl ‫ ﺗـَﺸﻜﯿﻞ‬or vowellization. Tashkyl is not normally used in written arabic apart
from in the Quran. If they are used, they are written above a consonant but pronounced after it: for
the convenience of non-arabic readers, I have included the tashkyl, but written it after the
consonant.
Transliterated arabic
The transliterated form is an exact representation of the arabic script in roman letters: this is not
always straightforward, as there are a lot more letters and modifiers in arabic than there are in the
roman alphabet.
If you want to be able to say words accurately, you need to be able to read either arabic or the
transliterated form- for example, so that you can see the difference between syn and saad.
Here is a summary of the less obvious features of the system:
Letter Transliterated Pronounced/arabic

aeiu
short vowel a [e] i u
َ ُِ
a 'e i uu
long vowel (alif) aa ee ii uu
‫ا َ آ ا ِ ُا‬
'a 'i 'u
alif with hamza aac iic uuc
‫أ إ ُأ‬
yw
yw
other long vowels yw
‫يو‬
'y 'w
other long vowels with hamza yc wc
‫ئ‬
'
gluttal stop qaf q
‫ق‬
q
voiced qaf Q
‫ق‬
dhstz
soft consonant dhstz
‫دهستز‬
dhstz
hard consonant DHSTZ
‫ضحصطظ‬
z sh th
double-letter consonants dh sh th
‫ذشث‬
-a
t-marbuta o
‫ــَة‬
-a
alif-layena Y
‫ـﻰ‬
It is readable if you ignore hamza ' ‫ ء‬and tee-marbuta - ‫ـﺔ‬, and read atif-layena a ‫ ى‬as a.
Pronounced arabic
The pronounced form is supposed to be how an english person would write a word or phrase. For
ease of reading, the pronounced arabic in this document does not follow the rules that join words
together, for example sun letters and consonant clusters.
the alphabet
This table shows how to read and pronounce the arabic letters, and how they are written in roman
letters throughout the dictionary.
trans
name arabic pronounced examples Notes
literated
'aywa
‫أﯾﻮَا‬
alif ‫أ‬ mas'ala
aac 'a
hamza above ‫ـــــﺄ‬ ‫ﻣـَﺴﺄﻟـَﺔ‬
bad'a
‫ﺑـَﺪأ‬
'intaeg
‫إﻧﺘﺎ َج‬
ae as in luGaet
after soft consonant
aeroplane ‫ﻟـُﻐﺎ َت‬
makaen
‫ﻣـَﻜﺎ َن‬
alif ‫َا‬ ‫ﻣـَﻜﺎ َن‬
aa
fatha ‫ـــــَﺎ‬ hamraa'
‫ﺣـَﻤﺮا َء‬
faar after hard consonant
aa as in hard
‫ﻓﺎ َر‬ before r
Gata
‫ﻏـَﻄَﺎ‬
alif ‫ِا‬ ilwalad
ii i
kasra ‫ـــــِﺎ‬ ‫ا ِﻟﻮ َﻟـَﺪ‬
'ism
‫إﺳﻢ‬
alif 'istanna
‫إ‬ iic 'i
hamza below ‫إﺳﺘَـﻨّﻰ‬
'itfaehim
‫إﺗﻔﺎ َﻫـِﻢ‬
'umm
alif
‫ُأ‬ uuc 'u
‫أ ُ ّم‬
damma 'ustaez
‫أ ُﺳﺘﺎ َذ‬
'esif
‫آﺳـِﻒ‬
alif ‫آ‬ mut'ekil
ee ee
PRO version Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API ‫ﻣـُﺘﺂﻛـِﻞ‬ pdfcrowd.com
ee ee
madda ‫ـــــﺂ‬ ‫ﻣـُﺘﺂﻛـِﻞ‬
'echir
‫آﺧـِﺮ‬
baAd
‫ب‬ ‫ﺑـَﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑـــــ‬ kibyr
by b b
‫ـــــﺒـــــ‬ ‫ﻛـِﺒﯿﺮ‬
‫ـــــﺐ‬ gawaeb
‫ﺟـَﻮا َب‬
taht
‫ت‬ ‫ﺗـَﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺗـــــ‬ 'aktar
ty t t
‫ـــــﺘـــــ‬ ‫أﻛﺘـَﺮ‬
‫ـــــﺖ‬ kursaet
‫ﻛـُﺮﺳﺎ َت‬
thabbit
‫ث‬ ‫ﺛَـﺒﱢـﺖ‬
‫ﺛـــــ‬ mathal
thy th th
‫ـــــﺜـــــ‬ ‫ﻣـَﺜـَﻞ‬
‫ـــــﺚ‬ bahth
‫ﺑـَﺤﺚ‬
gaeb
‫ج‬ ‫ﺟﺎ َب‬
‫ﺟـــــ‬ magmuAa
gyn g g
‫ـــــﺠـــــ‬ ‫ع‬
َ ‫ﻣـَﺠﻤﻮ‬
‫ـــــﺞ‬ churraag
‫ﺧﻮرّا َج‬
jaekit
‫چ‬ ‫ﭼﺎ َﻛـِﺖ‬
‫ﭼـــــ‬ 'ajinda not arabic
jyn j j
‫ـــــﭽـــــ‬ ‫أﭼـِﻨﺪَا‬ borrowed from farsi
‫ـــــﭻ‬ byj
‫ﺑﯿﭻ‬
haedith
‫ح‬ ‫ﺣـَـ ﺪ ِث‬
‫ﺣـــــ‬ 'ihna
ha H h
‫ـــــﺤـــــ‬ ‫إﺣﻨَﺎ‬
‫ـــــﺢ‬ yiruh
‫ﯾـِﺮوح‬
chaaf
‫خ‬ ‫ﺧﺎ َف‬
‫ﺧـــــ‬ ch achaz
kha K
‫ـــــﺨـــــ‬ as in loch ‫ا َﺧـَﺬ‬
‫ـــــﺦ‬ taarych
‫ﺗﺎ َرﯾﺦ‬
daem
‫دا َم‬
‫د‬ nady
dal d d
‫ـــــﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺎ َدي‬
zaed
‫زا َد‬
zaekar
‫ذا َﻛـَﺮ‬
‫ذ‬ z kizb
thal dh
‫ـــــﺬ‬ th as in there ‫ﻛـِﺬب‬
'ustaez
‫أ ُﺳﺘﺎ َذ‬
raah
‫را َح‬
‫ر‬ tary'
ray r r
‫ـــــﺮ‬ ‫ﻃـَﺮﯾﻖ‬
'iftakar
‫إﻓﺘـَﻜـَﺮ‬
zayy
‫ز َﯾﻲ‬
‫ز‬ gazar
zyn z z
‫ـــــﺰ‬ ‫ﺟـَﺰ َر‬
gahhiz
‫ﺟَـﻬﱢـﺰ‬
sitt
‫س‬ ‫ﺖ‬
ّ ‫ﺳِـ‬
‫ﺳـــــ‬ masaa'
syn s s
‫ـــــﺴـــــ‬ ‫ﻣـَﺴﺎ َء‬
‫ـــــﺲ‬ dars
‫د َرس‬
shaef
‫ش‬ ‫ﺷﺎ َف‬
‫ﺷـــــ‬ rashwa
shyn sh sh
‫ـــــﺸـــــ‬ ‫ر َﺷﻮ َة‬
‫ـــــﺶ‬ mish
‫ﻣـِﺶ‬
sanf
‫ص‬ ‫ﺻـَﻨﻒ‬
‫ﺻـــــ‬ 'asad
saad S s
‫ـــــﺼـــــ‬ ‫ﻗـَﺼـَﺪ‬
‫ـــــﺺ‬ chaalis
dahr
‫ض‬ ‫ﺿـَﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺿـــــ‬ hadritak
‫ﺿـــــ‬ ‫‪hadritak‬‬
‫‪daad‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬
‫ـــــﻀـــــ‬ ‫ﺣـَﻀﺮ ِﺗـَﻚ‬
‫ـــــﺾ‬ ‫‪'abyad‬‬
‫أﺑﯿـَﺾ‬
‫‪taba'a‬‬
‫ط‬ ‫ﻃـَﺒـَﻘـَﺔ‬
‫ﻃـــــ‬ ‫‪batal‬‬
‫‪taa‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬
‫ـــــﻄـــــ‬ ‫ﺑـَﻄـَﻞ‬
‫ـــــﻂ‬ ‫‪Galat‬‬
‫ﻏـَﻠـَﻂ‬
‫‪zarf‬‬
‫ظ‬ ‫ﻇـَﺮف‬
‫ﻇـــــ‬ ‫‪yizhar‬‬
‫‪zaa‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬
‫ـــــﻈـــــ‬ ‫ﯾـِﻈﻬـَﺮ‬
‫ـــــﻆ‬ ‫‪hazz‬‬
‫ﻆ‬
‫ﺣَـ ّ‬
‫‪Aala‬‬
‫ع‬ ‫ﻋـَﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋـــــ‬ ‫‪baAd‬‬
‫‪ain‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A - nasal a‬‬
‫ـــــﻌـــــ‬ ‫ﺑـَﻌﺪ‬
‫ـــــﻊ‬ ‫‪taebiA‬‬
‫ﺗـَـ ﺒـِﻊ‬
‫‪Galab‬‬
‫‪PRO version‬‬ ‫‪Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API‬‬ ‫‪pdfcrowd.com‬‬
‫غ‬ ‫ﻏـَﻠـَﺐ‬
‫ﻏـــــ‬ suGayar
gin G G - gargling noise
‫ـــــﻐـــــ‬ ‫ﺻـُﻐـَﯿـَﺮ‬
‫ـــــﻎ‬ baeliG
‫ﺑﺎ َﻟـِﻎ‬
fiAlaen
‫ف‬ ‫ﻼ‬
ً ‫ﻓـِﻌ‬
‫ﻓـــــ‬ mifalis
fah f f
‫ـــــﻔـــــ‬ ‫ﻣـِﻔـَﻠـِﺲ‬
‫ـــــﻒ‬ nidyf
‫ﻧـِﻀﯿﻒ‬
vyla
‫ڤ‬
‫ڤـــــ‬
‫ﻼ‬
َ ‫ ڤﯿ‬not arabic
veh v v
‫ـــــڤـــــ‬ borrowed from farsi
nuvimbir
‫ـــــڤ‬
‫ﻧﻮڤـِﻤﺒـِﺮ‬
'udaem
‫ﻗـُﺪا َم‬
' nu'ta
q as in cockney bottle
(bo'le) ‫ﻧـُﻘﻄـَﺔ‬
sadda'
‫ق‬
‫ﻗـــــ‬ ‫ ﺻَـ ّﺪ َق‬cannot tell from arabic
qaf whether qaf is pronounced
‫ـــــﻘـــــ‬ qana
‫ـــــﻘـــــ‬ qana upper egyptians say g
‫ـــــﻖ‬ ‫ﻗـَﻨَﺎ‬
k raqam
q
sounds swallowed ‫ر َﻗـَﻢ‬
sadyq
‫ﺻـَﺪﯾﻖ‬
kaen
‫ك‬ ‫ﻛﺎ َن‬
‫ﻛـــــ‬ 'aktar
kef k k
‫ـــــﻜـــــ‬ ‫أﻛﺘـَﺮ‬
‫ـــــﻚ‬ hadritak
‫ﺣـَﻀﺮ ِﺗـَﻚ‬
lakin
‫ل‬ ‫ﻟـَﻜـِﻦ‬
‫ﻟـــــ‬ Aala
lem l l
‫ـــــﻠـــــ‬ ‫ﻋـَﻠﻰ‬
‫ـــــﻞ‬ ful
‫ﻓﻮل‬
mumkin
‫م‬ ‫ﻣـُﻤﻜـِﻦ‬
‫ﻣـــــ‬ Aaemil
mym m m
‫ـــــﻤـــــ‬ ‫ﻋﺎ َﻣـِﻞ‬
‫ـــــﻢ‬ naem
‫ﻧﺎ َم‬
nashaat
‫ن‬ ‫ﻧـَﺸﺎ َط‬
‫ﻧـــــ‬ 'ihna
nwn n n
‫ـــــﻨـــــ‬ ‫إﺣﻨَﺎ‬
‫ـــــﻦ‬ sinyn
‫ﺳـِﻨﯿﻦ‬
‫ه‬ hina
hey
‫ﻫـــــ‬
h h
‫ﻫـِﻨَﺎ‬
‫ـــــﻬـــــ‬ zahar
‫ـــــﻪ‬ ‫ز َﻫـَﺮ‬
sura
‫ــــــَة‬ _ah a
‫ﺻﻮر َة‬
tee-marbuta
'izzaezit zyt genitive
‫ــــــِة‬ _it it
‫ إزّا َز ِة زﯾﺖ‬bottle of oil
wishsh
‫ش‬
ّ ِ‫و‬
‫و‬ yum
wow w w
‫ـــــﻮ‬ ‫ﯾﻮم‬
Audw
‫ﻋـُﺪو‬
s'wael
wow-hamza wc 'w
‫ﺳ ا َل‬
‫ـــــ‬ mas'wliya
‫ﻣـَﺴ ﻟـِﯿـَﺔ‬
‫وا‬ 'intu unusual pronunciation
wow-alif oo u
‫ـــــﻮا‬ ‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ for verb endings
yizhar
‫ي‬ ‫ﯾـِﻈﻬـَﺮ‬
‫ﯾـــــ‬ taarych
yeh y y
‫ـــــﯿـــــ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ َرﯾﺦ‬
‫ـــــﻲ‬ zayy
‫ز َﯾﻲ‬
ra'yys
‫ئ‬
‫ر َﺋﯿﺲ‬
yeh-hamza ‫ـــــﺌـــــ‬ yc 'y
daf'y
‫ـــــﺊ‬
‫دا َﻓﺊ‬
Aala
alif-layena
‫ى‬
Y a
‫ ﻋـَﻠﻰ‬used at end of words
‫ـــــﻰ‬ nada
‫ﻧﺎ َدى‬
alif-layena muthannae
‫ ى ـــــﻰ‬Ye e
madda ‫ﻣـُﺜَـﻨّﻰ‬
short vowels
dawla
‫د َوﻟـَﺔ‬
basal
‫ﺑـَﺼـَﻞ‬
fatha a a 'inta
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬
'arbaAa
‫أرﺑَـ َﻊ‬
madda e e short e rarely used
min
‫ﻣـِﻦ‬
kibyr
kasra i i
‫ﻛـِﺒﯿﺮ‬
'inti
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬
sufrah
‫ﺳـُﻔﺮ َه‬
tulaeb
damma u u
‫ﻃـُﻼ َب‬
'anhuh
‫أﻧﻬﻮه‬
sukun silent means that there is no vowel
other symbols
sadda'
shadda
‫ ﺻَـ ّﺪ َق‬doubles the letter
hadd it is above
‫ﺣَـ ّﺪ‬
fathatan daeymaen used on alif
N n
tanwyn ‫دا َﯾﻤًﺎ‬ at end of word
tatwyl ‫ـ‬ used for spacing
'ana
‫أﻧَﺎ‬
‫أ‬ aac
r'ya
‫ـﺌـ‬ yc small above alif, yeh, wow
‫ـ‬ wc
‫رﺋـَﺔ‬
' s'wael
hamza as in cockney bottle ‫ا َل‬ ‫ﺳ‬
(bo'le)
hawaa'
‫ء‬ C
‫ ﻫـَﻮا َء‬full size, on its own
laa'
‫ﻻ َء‬
©Copyright Mike Green 2010-2012
You can print out this table and keep it handy for reference.
Stress
In most words, the second to last syllable is usually stressed.
'iftakar ‫إﻓﺘـَﻜـَﺮ‬
kitaeb ‫ﻛـِﺘﺎ َب‬
mudachan ‫ﻣـُﺪ َﺧـَﻦ‬
The stress moves to the last syllable if it contains a long vowel (alif, wow, yeh) or ends with a
double consonant. Remember that the letter AIN is treated as a consonant.
taAbaen ‫ﺗـَﻌﺒﺎ َن‬

maftuh ‫ﻣـَﻔﺘﻮح‬
yidu'' ‫ق‬
ّ ُ ‫ﯾـِﺪ‬
This means that the stress will move if suffixes are added to a word.
Feminine endings
When a word ends in _aaCiC (where C is any consonant) has a feminine ending attached, the i
disappears and the aa is pronounced as an a.
waehid ‫ وا َﺣـِﺪ‬-> wahda ‫وا َﺣﺪ َة‬

Elision
If a word ends with a vowel and the first vowel of the next word is either an i or a u, the words are
run together (elided) and the i or u omitted.
'inta minyn? ‫ إﻧﺖ َ ﻣـِﻨﯿﻦ؟‬-> 'intamnyn? ‫إﻧﺘـَﻤﻨﯿﻦ؟‬
This also happens if you attach an object suffix that begins with an i.
consonant clusters
If putting two words next to each other makes more than two consonants in a row, a shwa (which
sounds like a short a) is inserted between the words.
baAd kidah ‫ ﺑـَﻌﺪ ﻛـِﺪ َه‬-> baAdakidah ‫ﺑـَﻌﺪ َﻛـِﺪ َه‬
Sun letters
If the definite article, il- ‫ ا ِﻟـ‬, is attached to a word that begins with a sun-letter (t t d d l r n s s z z ‫ت ط‬
‫ )د ض ل ر ن س ص ز ظ‬the l is dropped and the sun-letter is doubled:
il- shams ‫ ا ِﻟـ ﺷـَﻤﺲ‬-> ishshams ‫ا ِﺷﱠـﻤﺲ‬
Pronunciation exceptions
The pronunciation of some pronoun and verb endings is a little unusual. For the you(pl) 'intu ‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬
subject pronoun and for you(pl) and they in the verb perfect, the ending is written -w a ‫ ـﻮ َا‬but
pronounced -uh ‫ــُه‬.
The word because is written Aalashaen ‫ ﻋـَﻠـَﺸﺎ َن‬but pronounced Aashaen ‫ﻋـَﺸﺎ َن‬.
The word orange is written burtu'ael ‫ ﺑـُﺮﺗـُﻘﺎ َل‬but pronounced burtu'aen ‫ﺑـُﺮﺗـُﻘﺎ َن‬.
Irregular verbs
There are very few irregular verbs in Egyptian: here are all the ones that I know of:
be/was - kaen ‫ﻛﺎ َن‬

eat - kul ‫ﻛـُﻞ‬
take - chud ‫ﺧـُﺪ‬
come - gih ‫ﺟـِﻪ‬
give - idda ‫ﱠِد‬
fall - wi'iA ‫و ِﻗـِﻊ‬
stop - wi'if ‫و ِﻗـِﻒ‬
Be - kaen ‫ﻛﺎ َن‬
The verb 'to be' does not exist in the present tense. It is used only in the perfect and Ha-imperfect
forms.
English Pronoun Perfect Ha-Imperfect
'ana kunt hakun
I
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﻫـَﻜﻮن‬
'ihna kunna hankun
we
‫إﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻛُـ ﱠ‬ ‫ﻫـَﻨﻜﻮن‬
'inta kunt hatkun
you (m)
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘﻜﻮن‬
'inti kunty hatkuny
you (f)
‫ﺖ‬
ِ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻨﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
'intu kuntuh hatkunuh
you (pl)
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﻛـُﻨﺘـُﻪ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘﻜﻮﻧـُﻪ‬
huwwa kaen haykun
he
‫ﻫُـ ﱠﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎ َن‬ ‫ﻫـَﯿﻜﻮن‬
hiya kaenit hatkun
she
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻛﺎ َﻧـِﺖ ﻫِـ‬ ‫ﻫـَﺘﻜﻮن‬
humma kanuh haykunuh
they
‫ﻛﺎ َﻧﻮه ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻫـَﯿﻜﻮﻧـُﻪ‬
Eat- kul ‫ﻛـُﻞ‬
kul has irregular imperfect froms
Active
Pronoun Perfect Imperfect Imperative
Participle
'ana kalt akul
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺖ‬ ‫ا َﻛـُﻞ‬
ihna kalna naekul
‫ا ِﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺎ َﻛـُﻞ‬
'inta kalt taekul kul
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ َﻛـُﻞ‬ ‫ﻛـُﻞ‬
'inty kalty takly kuly
‫إﻧﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗـَﻜﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻟﻲ‬
'intu kaltu kalu kulw
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﻮا‬ ‫ﻛـُﻠﻮ‬
huwa kal yaekul
‫ﻫُـ َﻮ‬ ‫ﻛـَﻞ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ َﻛـُﻞ‬
hiya kalit taekul
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠـِﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ َﻛـُﻞ‬
humma kalw yakluh
‫ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻛـَﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﯾـَﻜﻠﻮه‬
Take- chud ‫ﺧـُﺪ‬

Kud has irregular imperfect froms
Active
Participle
'ana chudt achud
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﺧـُﺪت‬ ‫ا َﺧـُﺪ‬
ihna chadna naechud
‫ا ِﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﺧـَﺪﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺎ َﺧـُﺪ‬
'inta chudt taechud chud
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﺧـُﺪت‬ ‫ﺗﺎ َﺧـُﺪ‬ ‫ﺧـُﺪ‬
'inty chady tachdy chudty
‫إﻧﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺧـَﺪي‬ ‫ﺗـَﺨﺪي‬ ‫ﺧـُﺪﺗﻲ‬
'intu chadtw chadtw chudw
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﺧـَﺪﺗﻮ‬ ‫ﺧـَﺪﺗﻮ‬ ‫ﺧـُﺪو‬
huwa achad yaechud
‫ﻫُـ َﻮ‬ ‫ا َﺧـَﺪ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ َﺧـُﺪ‬
hiya chadit taechud
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫ﺧـَﺪ ِت‬ ‫ﺗﺎ َﺧـُﺪ‬
humma achadu yachduh
‫ا َﺧـَﺪوا ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﯾـَﺨﺪ ُه‬
Come- gih ‫ﺟـِﻪ‬
Active
Participle
'ana gyt 'egy
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﯿﺖ‬ ‫آﺟﻲ‬
ihna gyna nygy
‫ا ِﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﯿﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﯿﺠﻲ‬
'inta gyt tygy taAaela gaey
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫ﺟﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﯿﺠﻲ‬ ‫ل‬
َ َ ‫ﺗـَﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﺎ َي‬
'inty gyty tygy taAaly gaeya
‫إﻧﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﯿﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﯿﺠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗـَﻌﺎ َﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺎ َﯾَﺎ‬
'intu gytu tygu taAalu gayyin
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﺟﯿﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﺗﯿﺠﻮا‬ ‫ﺗـَﻌﺎ َﻟﻮا‬ ‫ﺟـَﯿﯿـِﻦ‬
huwa gih yigy
‫ﻫُـ َﻮ‬ ‫ﺟـِﻪ‬ ‫ﯾـِﺠﻲ‬
hiya gaet tigy
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫ﺟﺎ َت‬ ‫ﺗـِﺠﻲ‬
humma gum yigu
‫ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻮم‬ ‫ﯾـِﺠﻮا‬
Give- idda ِ‫ّدى‬
Active
Participle
'ana 'idyt addy
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫إدﯾﺖ‬ ‫ا َدّي‬
ihna 'iddyna niddy
‫ا ِﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫إدﱠﯾﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻧِـﺪّي‬
'inta 'iddyt tiddy 'iddy
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫إدّﯾﺖ‬ ‫ﺗِـﺪّي‬ ‫إدّي‬
'inty 'iddyty tiddy 'iddit
‫إﻧﺘﻲ‬ ‫إدّﯾﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗِـﺪّي‬ ‫إ ّد ِت‬
'intu 'iddytu tiddu 'iddu
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫إدّﯾﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﺗِـﺪّوا‬ ‫إدّوا‬
huwa 'idda yiddy
‫ﻫُـ َﻮ‬ ‫إدّى‬ ‫ﯾِـﺪّي‬
hiya 'iddyt tiddy
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫إدّﯾﺖ‬ ‫ﺗِـﺪّي‬
humma 'iddu yiddu
‫ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫إدّوا‬ ‫ﯾِـﺪّوا‬
fall- wi'iA ‫و ِﻗـِﻊ‬
Active
Participle
'ana wi'iAt a'aA
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫و ِﻗـِﻌﺖ‬ ‫ا َﻗـَﻊ‬
ihna wi'iAna nu'aA
‫ا ِﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫و ِﻗـِﻌﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻧـُﻘـَﻊ‬
'inta wi'iAt tu'aA wae'iA
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫و ِﻗـِﻌﺖ‬ ‫ﺗـُﻘـَﻊ‬ ‫وا َﻗـِﻊ‬
'inty wi'iAty tu'aAy wa'Ait
‫و ِﻗـِﻌﺘﻲ إﻧﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗـُﻘـَﻌﻲ‬ ‫وا َﻗﻌـِﺖ‬
'intu wi'iAtu tu'aAu wa'Ayn
‫و ِﻗـِﻌﺘﻮا إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﺗـُﻘـَﻌﻮا‬ ‫وا َﻗﻌﯿﻦ‬
huwa wi'iA yu'aA
‫ﻫُـ َﻮ‬ ‫و ِﻗـِﻊ‬ ‫ﯾـُﻘـَﻊ‬
hiya wi'Ait tu'aA
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫و ِﻗﻌـِﺖ‬ ‫ﺗـُﻘـَﻊ‬
humma wi'Au yu'aAu
‫ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫و ِﻗﻌﻮا‬ ‫ﯾـُﻘـَﻌﻮا‬
stand- wi'if ‫و ِﻗـِﻒ‬
Active
Participle
'ana wi'ift a'af
‫أﻧَﺎ‬ ‫و ِﻗـِﻔﺖ‬ ‫ا َﻗـَﻒ‬
ihna wi'ifna nu'af
‫ا ِﺣﻨَﺎ‬ ‫و ِﻗـِﻔﻨَﺎ‬ ‫ﻧـُﻘـَﻒ‬
'inta wi'ift tu'af uu'af wae'if
‫ﺖ‬
َ ‫إﻧ‬ ‫و ِﻗـِﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﺗـُﻘـَﻒ‬ ‫ا ُﻗـَﻒ‬ ‫وا َﻗـِﻒ‬
wi'ifty wae'ifty
'inty tu'afy uu'afy
‫و‬ ‫وا‬
‫إﻧﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗـُﻘـَﻔﻲ‬ ‫ا ُﻗـَﻔﻲ‬
‫ِقـِفتي‬ ‫َقـِفتي‬
wi'iftu
'intu tu'afu uu'afu wae'ifyn
‫و‬
‫إﻧﺘﻮا‬ ‫ﺗـُﻘـَﻔﻮا‬ ‫ا ُﻗـَﻔﻮا‬ ‫وا َﻗـِﻔﯿﻦ‬
‫ِقـِفتوا‬
huwa wi'if yu'af
‫ﻫُـ َﻮ‬ ‫و ِﻗـِﻒ‬ ‫ﯾـُﻘـَﻒ‬
hiya wi'fit tu'af
‫ﻲ‬
َ ‫ﻫِـ‬ ‫و ِﻗﻔـِﺖ‬ ‫ﺗـُﻘـَﻒ‬
humma wi'fu yu'afu
‫ﻫُـﻤﱠﺎ‬ ‫و ِﻗﻔﻮا‬ ‫ﯾـُﻘـَﻔﻮا‬
Verbs: Root and Stem

A verb is made up of a root (a set of consonants) and a stem (a prefix and the vowels between).
There may be more than one verb derived from the same root- for example, starting with fhm, you
can make fihim (to understand) and fahhim (to make somebody understand).
Most roots have three consonants: it is conventional to describe this type of verb using the letters
K, T and B, as in kitab ‫ﻛـِﺘـَﺐ‬, write. For words with four consonants, the letter L is used as well. A
small number of roots have two or four consonants. There are five main roots, and each of these
can make three main stem types, as per the following table. Note that, in arabic, AIN is treated a
consonant, so Airif is of the form KiTiB.
A B C D E
1 KVT KvTv KvTT KvTvB KvTBvL
2 KvVVvT KvTTv KvTTvT KvTTvB
3 KaaViT KaaTi KvTT KaaTiB KvTBvL
KTBL=root consonants v=aiu V=wy
From any of these main stems, it is possible to derive more stems by adding prefixes. Here are
some examples:
Prefix Main stem Derived stem Meaning

iitKvTvB passive (be *-ed)
iit- KvTvB
yitKvTvB reflexive (* oneself)
iitKaTTaB passive (be *-ed)
iit- KvTTvB
yitKvTTvB reflexive (* oneself)
KaaTiB iitKaaTiB
iit- each other
yiKTvB yitKaaTiB
iiKtvTvB
iiKt- KvTvB as iit-
yiKtvTvB
iinKvTvB
iin- KvTvB as iit-
yinKvTvB
iistaKvTvB
iista- KvTvB consider or seek
yistaKvTvB
There are also some verbs that are derived from classical arabic- the perfect genarally begins with
aa-, and the imperfect with yu-.
About this document

I would like to thank the residents of the White House, Suze Labib and Rana el Hindy for helping
me to make this possible.
The logo was designed by Khaled Adel of Absolute Studios.
This document is a work in progress. It was developed and revised over several years as a study
aid for my own use: It has been extensively checked, but I am sure that there are still mistakes and
omissions.
The dictionary and grammar are supplied 'as is': you are welcome to use them on condition that you
do not hold me responsible for any loss, injury or embarrassment that may result from their use. See
the copyright notice if you wish to publish any part of this document.
If you notice any errors or omissions or have suggestions for improvements, you can contact me
using the Contact us page.
Cookies
You were probably wondering about cookies. Or maybe not. The web and android versions of this
document use cookies to remember your preferences for transliterated, pronounced and show
arabic. No personal data, nothing sinister.
Copyright
This material is Copyright © 2007-2012 Mike Green.
You may distribute the documents and applications free of charge if it is strictly for non-commercial
use, and:
either the material is supplied complete and in its existing form

or extracts from the material are attributed to www.lisaanmasry.com and carry the original
copyright details of the document
If you need to access the entire dictionary database for any reason, please ask and maybe I can
supply it in a more convenient form.
Mike Green

Ead Grammar v1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ead Grammar v1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents

Section III - Usage

Section IV - How to say...

This section will be coming soon...

Arabic writing and pronunciation

This document is made up of three main sections:

A word about arabic writing

The essentials- Same same but different

Ahmed loves sarah

Element English Egyptian

Sarah loves Ahmed

Subject and Object

Element English Egyptian

Element English Egyptian

Here are a few more examples:

Meaning English Egyptian

Masculine, feminine, plural

Gender English Arabic

describing English Egyptian

English Egyptian English Egyptian

I want to make bread but I don't have enough flour

Part English Egyptian

Element English Egyptian

Type English Arabic

Masculine and feminine

Gender Ending Singular Plural

English Singular Plural

English Collective one

English Collective a piece

English on its own with pronoun

There are four main groups of pronoun:

personal pronouns - I, you, he, etc

English Egyptian Form

The subject pronouns are:

Object pronoun suffixes

give me the knife

possessive pronoun suffix

what (is) your name?

Nouns ending in two consonants

Nouns ending in -a ‫ــَة‬

Nouns ending in a vowel

Father and brother 'abb ‫ب‬

reflexive pronouns (myself, yourself, himself)

Reflexive pronouns can be used after a noun or a verb.

demonstrative English Egyptian

the left turn that is coming (ie the next left)

Masculine, feminine, plural

English Country m f collective noun

Slightly, Very... Extremely...

The following adverbs can be placed after the adjective:

Here are some examples:

We can compare two things using min ‫ﻣـِﻦ‬:

English adjective comparative

English adjective comparative

Group English Egyptian

tense - when something happens (past, present, future)

subject - I, we, you, he, she, it, they

Pronoun English Arabic

The subject pronoun appears before the verb or participle.

Here are some examples:

Some verbs require two objects- for example:

Tense English Egyptian

The imperfect has no meaning on its own: it is used in four ways:

with kaen ‫ ﻛﺎ َن‬for things that happened in the past